Carrier 30MPA015, 30MPW015, 30MPW071, 30MPA071, 30MPW Controls, Start-up, Operation, Service, And Troubleshooting

...

Download

30MPA,MPW015-071

Liquid Chillers with Scroll Compressors

and ComfortLink Controls

Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Service, and Troubleshooting

AquaSnap

Page

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,3

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Basic Controls Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Main Base Board (MBB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

AUX Board (AUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Energy Management Module (EMM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Current Sensor Board (CSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Expansion Valve (EXV) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Enable/Off/Remote Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Emergency On/Off Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Carrier Comfort Network

Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

• COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR

• COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR

• CONDENSER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR

• CONDENSER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR

• COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR

• OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

• DUAL LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR

• DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR

• SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Energy Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Condenser Flow Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Thermostatic Expansion Valves (TXV) . . . . . . . . . . 16

Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

• MINUTES LEFT FOR START

• MINUTES OFF TIME

• CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES

Time, Day, and Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Operation of Machine Based on Control Method. . 21

Cooling Set Point Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Ice Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Cooler Pump Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Alarm Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Condenser Pump/Condenser Fan Output

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control. . 27

Temperature Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

• DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled)

• EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to 20 mA Controlled)

• DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled)

Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Page

Digital Scroll Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36,37

System Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

START-UP AND OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-40

Actual Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Check Refrigerant Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Check Compressor Oil Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Adjust Oil Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

• TEMPERATURES

• VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS

OPERATION SEQUENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-52

Service Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

• CONTROL COMPONENTS

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

EXV Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Compressor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

30MP Cooler and 30MPW Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . 44

• BRAZED-PLATE COOLER AND CONDENSER HEAT EXCHANGER REPLACEMENT

• BRAZED-PLATE COOLER AND CONDENSER HEAT EXCHANGER CLEANING

Water Treatment . .

Oil Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Check Refrigerant Feed Components . . . . . . . . . . . 45

• FILTER DRIER

• MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR

• THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (TXV)

• MINIMUM LOAD VALVE

• PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES

Check Unit Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Chilled Water Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Replacing Defective Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Recommended Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . 52

TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-71

Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . 52

• GENERAL POWER FAILURE

• UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH IS OFF

• CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN

• OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER(S)

• COOLING LOAD SATISFIED

• THERMISTOR FAILURE

• ENABLING AND DISABLING COMPRESSORS

• COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE

• LOW SATURATED SUCTION

• COMPRESSOR SAFETIES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300170-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30MP-4T Pg 1 8-17 Replaces: 30MP-3T

CONTENTS (cont)

Page

Motor Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

• COPELAND COMPRESSOR MODELS WITH ELECTRICAL CODE TF

• COPELAND COMPRESSOR MODELS WITH ELECTRICAL CODE TW OR TE

• BITZER PROTECTION MODULE

• FIELD TROUBLESHOOTING SOLID-STATE MOTOR PROTECTION MODULE

Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES . . . 72-81

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-87

APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION

OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88-94

APPENDIX D — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND

LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,96

INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30MP LIQUID

CHILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CL-1 to CL-8

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be

hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and equipment location (elevated structures, mechanical rooms, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service mechanics should install, start up, and service this equipment.

When working on this equipment, observe precautions in

the literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in handling all electrical components.

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed.

WARNING

DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building. Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE (American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers) 15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.

WARNING

DO NOT USE TORCH to remove any component. System contains oil and refrigerant under pressure.

To remove a component, wear protective gloves and goggles and proceed as follows:

a. Shut off electrical power to unit. b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from sys-

tem using both high-pressure and low pressure ports.

c. Traces of vapor should be displaced with nitrogen

and the work area should be well ventilated. Refrigerant in contact with an open flame produces toxic gases.

d. Cut component connection tubing with tubing cutter

and remove component from unit. Use a pan to catch any oil that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil to add to the system.

e. Carefully unsweat remaining tubing stubs when nec-

essary. Oil can ignite when exposed to torch flame.

Failure to follow these procedures may result in personal injury or death.

CAUTION

DO NOT re-use compressor oil or any oil that has been exposed to the atmosphere. Dispose of oil per local codes and regulations. DO NOT leave refrigerant system open to air any longer than the actual time required to service the equipment. Seal circuits being serviced and charge with dry nitrogen to prevent oil contamination when timely repairs cannot be completed. Failure to follow these procedures may result in damage to equipment.

CAUTION

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out components, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic modules or electrical components.

CAUTION

To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing refrigerant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler fluid loop to prevent the freezing of brazed plate heat exchanger when the equipment is exposed to temperatures below 32 F (0° C). Proof of flow switch is factory installed on all models. Do NOT remove power from this chiller during winter shutdown periods without taking precaution to remove all water from heat exchanger and optional hydronic system. Failure to properly protect the system from freezing may constitute abuse and may result in loss of warranty coverage.

CAUTION

Compressors require specific rotation. Monitor control alarms during first compressor start-up for reverse rotation protection. Damage to unit may result.

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

CAUTION

Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss of compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.

CAUTION

Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) systems operate at higher pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equipment. If service equipment is not rated for Puron refrigerant, equipment damage or personal injury may result.

GENERAL

This publication contains Start-Up, Service, Controls, Operation, and Troubleshooting information for the 30MPW watercooled chillers and the 30MPA air-cooled chillers. For unit sizes, see Table 1. These liquid chillers are equipped with Com- fortLink controls and conventional thermostatic expansion valves (TXVs, units 30MP015-045) or electronic expansion valves (EXVs, units 30MP050-071). The 30MPA units and the 30MPW units with optional medium temperature brine are also equipped with liquid line solenoid valves (LLSVs).

CAUTION

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out or bypass components or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the board or electrical component.

Table 1 — Unit Sizes

UNIT MODEL NOMINAL TONS 30MPA,MPW015 15 30MPA,MPW020 20 30MPA,MPW030 30 30MPA,MPW040 40 30MPA,MPW045 45 30MPA,MPW050 50 30MPA,MPW055 55 30MPA,MPW060 60 30MPA,MPW065 65 30MPA,MPW071 71

Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow-

ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory) will be used in this manual.

Point names will be written with the mode name first, then any sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an arrow symbol (. Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an example, the Minimum Load Valve Select Point, which is located in the Configuration mode, Option 1 sub-mode, would be written as ConfigurationOPT1 MLV.S.

This path name will show the user how to navigate through the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the

and keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing to move into the next level of the menu structure.

When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example, ConfigurationOPT1MLV.S = YES (Minimum Load Valve Select).

Pressing the and keys simultaneously will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or value across the display. The expanded description is shown in the local display tables but will not be shown with the path names in text.

The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network

) point names are also referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the unit with CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN tables are located in Appendix B of the manual.

Basic Control Usage

SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY — This device is the keypad interface used for accessing unit information, reading sensor values, and testing the unit. The scrolling marquee display is a 4-key, 4-character, 16-segment LED (light-emitting diode) display. Eleven mode LEDs are located on the display as well as an Alarm Status LED. See Table 2. For further details, see Appendix A—Local Display Tables on page 72.

The scrolling marquee display module provides the user interface to the ComfortLink control system. The display has up and down arrow keys, an key, and an key. These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display structure. See Appendix A—Local Display Tables on page 72. Press the key until the display is blank to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display.

Pressing the and keys simultaneously will scroll a clear language text description across the display indicating the full meaning of each display acronym. Clear language descriptions will be displayed in the language of choice. Pressing the and keys when the display is blank (Mode LED level) will return the scrolling marquee display to its default menu of rotating display items, found under



Run Status

requiring that it be entered again before changes can be made to password protected items. After a period of time with no key activity, the scrolling marquee will display its default menu of rotating display items found under Run Status

When a specific item is located, the display will flash showing the operator, the item, the item value and then the item units (if any). Press the key to stop the display at the item value. Press the key again so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state of an item and press the key to accept it. Press the

sume. Repeat the process as required for other items.

NOTE: If a value has been forced, the lower right “.” will be flashing.

See Table 3 and Appendix A for further details.

VIEW. In addition, the password will be disabled,



VIEW.

key and the item, value, or units display will re-

Table 2 — Scrolling Marquee Display Menu Structure*

MODE

SUB-MODE

*Throughout this text, the location of items in the menu structure will be

described in the following format:

RUN

STATUS

Auto

View of

Run Status

(VIEW)

Unit Run Hour and

Start

(RUN)

Circuit and

Compressor

Run Hours

(HOUR)

Compressor

Starts

(STRT)

Preventive

intenance

(PM)

Software

Version (VERS)

Item Expansion (Mode Name For example, using the language selection item: Language Selection (Configuration

SERVICE

TEST

Service

Test Mode

(TEST)

Outputs

and Pumps

(OUTS)

Circuit A

Comp

Test

(CMPA)



TEMPERATURES PRESSURES

Unit Temperatures

(UNIT)

Temperatures

Circuit A

(CIR.A)

Sub-mode NameITEM)



DISPLANG)

Pressures

Circuit A (PRC.A)

SET

POINTS

Cooling

Setpoints

(COOL)

Head

Pressure

Setpoint

(HEAD)

Brine

Freeze

Setpoint

(FRZ)

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION

General

Inputs

(GEN.I)

Circuit Inputs

(CRCT)

4-20mA

Inputs (4-20)

General Outputs

(GEN.O)

Outputs

Circuit A

(CIR.A)

Outputs

Circuit A

EXV

(A.EXV)

Display

Configuration

(DISP)

Unit

Configuration

(UNIT)

Unit Options 1

Hardware

(OPT1)

Unit Options 2

Controls

(OPT2)

Circuit A EXV Configuration

(EXV.A)

CCN Network Configuration

(CCN)

Reset Cool Temp

(RSET)

Set Point and

Ramp Load

(SLCT) Service

Configuration

(SERV)

Broadcast

Configuration

(BCST)

TIME

CLOCK

Time of

Day

(TIME) Month,

Date, Day,

and Year

(DATE)

Daylight Savings

Time

(DST)

Local

Holiday

Schedules

(HOL.L)

Schedule

Number

(SCH.N)

Local Occupancy

Schedule

(SCH.L)

Schedule

Override

(OVR)

OPERATING

MODES

Modes

(MODE)

ALARMS

Current (CRNT)

Reset

Alarms

(RCRN)

Alarm History (HIST)

Table 3 — Operating Modes

MODE

NO.

01 CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER Chillervisor System Manager (CSM) is controlling the chiller. 02 WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER Water System Manager (WSM) is controlling the chiller. 03 MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL Dual Chiller control is enabled.

10 MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE Chiller is being held off by Minutes Off Time (Configuration

CSM — Chillervisor System Manager SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature WSM — Water System Manager

ITEM EXPANSION DESCRIPTION

RAMP LOAD LIMITED Ramp load (pull-down) limiting in effect. In this mode, the rate at which leaving fluid temperature

TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT Timed override is in effect. This is a 1 to 4 hour temporary override of the programmed

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA Circuit A cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Sat-

SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE Slow change override is in effect. The leaving fluid temperature is close to and moving

DUAL SETPOINT Dual Set Point mode is in effect. Chiller controls to Cooling Set Point 1 (Set Points

TEMPERATURE RESET Temperature reset is in effect. In this mode, chiller is using temperature reset to adjust leav-

DEMAND LIMITED Demand limit is in effect. This indicates that the capacity of the chiller is being limited by

COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION Cooler fluid temperatures are approaching the Freeze point (see Alarms and Alerts section

LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is negative and

HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is positive and increasing.

MAKING ICE Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is using Cooling Set Point 3 (Set Points

STORING ICE Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is controlling to Cooling Set Point 2 (Set Points

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than

MINIMUM COMP ON TIME Cooling load may be satisfied, however control continues to operate compressor to ensure

PUMP OFF DELAY TIME Cooling load is satisfied, however cooler pump continues to run for the number of minutes set

LEGEND

is dropped is limited to a predetermined value to prevent compressor overloading. See Cooling Ramp Loading (Configuration desired, to any rate from 0.2° F to 2° F (0.1° to 1° C)/minute.

schedule, forcing unit to Occupied mode. Override can be implemented with unit under Local (Enable) or CCN (Carrier Comfort Network

urated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set Points



BR.FZ) minus 6° F (3.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F

(7.8° C) for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7.8° C), for 90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.

towards the control point.



CSP.1) during occupied periods and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2)

during unoccupied periods.

ing fluid set point upward and is currently controlling to the modified set point. The set point can be modified based on return fluid, outdoor-air-temperature, space temperature, or 4 to 20 mA signal.

demand limit control option. Because of this limitation, the chiller may not be able to produce the desired leaving fluid temperature. Demand limit can be controlled by switch inputs or a 4 to 20 mA signal.

for definition). The chiller will be shut down when either fluid temperature falls below the Freeze point.

decreasing faster than -0.5° F (-0.3° C) per minute. Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically unload the chiller if necessary.

Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically load the chiller if necessary to better match the increasing load.



CSP.3) to make ice. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is open.



CSP.2). The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is closed.

the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing condensing temperature.

proper oil return. May be an indication of oversized application, low fluid flow rate or low loop volume.

by the configuration variable Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (Configuration



PM.DY).



SLCTCRMP). The pull-down limit can be modified, if

) control. Override expires after each use.



OPT2DELY).



COOL

OPT1





FRZ

COOL



COOL



ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE —

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

Fig. 1 — Accessory Navigator™ Display Module

The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the ComfortLink control system. The display has up and down arrow keys, an key, and an key. These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display structure. Press the key until ‘Select a Menu Item’ is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 1.

Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the cur-

rently selected item on the display screen. Pressing the

and keys simultaneously will put the Navigator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed. Pressing the and keys when the display says ‘Select Menu Item’ (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items



in Run Status

VIEW). In addition, the password will be dis-

abled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be made to password protected items. Press the key to exit out of the expanded text mode.

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration



DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display expansions will immediately change to the new language. No power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring languages.

When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the display. Press the key at a changeable item and the value will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value, and confirm the value by pressing the key.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state and press the key to accept it. Press the key to return to the next higher level of structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed when required, with 1111 also being displayed. The default password is 1111. Use the arrow keys to change the number and press to enter the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password. The password can only be changed through CCN operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS, ComfortVIEW and Service Tool.

Adjusting the Contrast

— The contrast of the display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast of the Navigator module, press the key until the display reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the Configuration mode. Press to obtain access to this mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF METR OFF LANG ENGLISH PAS.E ENBL

Pressing will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen. Pressing and simultaneously

allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use the up or down arrows to adjust the contrast. The screen’s contrast will change with the adjustment. Press to accept the change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

Adjusting the Backlight Brightness

— The backlight of the display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory default is set to the highest level. To adjust the backlight of the Navigator module, press the key until the display reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the Configuration mode. Press to obtain access to this mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF METR OFF LANG ENGLISH PAS.E ENBL

Pressing will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up

or down arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing

will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously allows the user to adjust the display brightness. Use the up or down arrow keys to adjust screen brightness. Press

to accept the change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

ComfortLink

MODE

Alarm Status

Run Status

Service Test

Temperatures

Pressures

Setpoints

Inputs

Outputs

Configuration

Time Clock

ESC

Operating M

odes

Alarms

ENTER

CHANGING THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE — The factory default language is English. Several other languages are available, including Spanish, French, and Portugese.

Required Configurations

— Table 4 shows the required con-

figurations for Language Selection.

Table 4 — LANG (Language Selection)

Required Configurations

SUB-

MODE

DISP LANG X Language

ITEM DISPLAY

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

Selection

COMMENT

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 3 0=English 1=Espanol 2=Francais 3=Portugese

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration



DISPLANG) variable is changed, all appropriate dis-

play expansions will immediately change to the new language. No power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring Language Selection.

CHANGING THE UNITS OF MEASURE — The factory default unit of measure is English (for example, °F, ^F, psi). The display can be changed to metric units (for example, °C, ^C, kPa).

Required Configurations

ENTER

— Table 5 shows the required con-

figurations for Metric Display.

Table 5 — METR (Metric Display)

Required Configurations

SUB-

MODE

DISP METR OFF/ON Metric Display Default: OFF

ITEM DISPLAY

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

OFF=English ON=Metric

NOTE: When the Metric Display (Configuration



DISPMETR) variable is changed, all appropriate dis-

play expansions will immediately change to the new units of measure. No power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring Metric Display.

CONFIGURATION AND SERVICE PASSWORD — Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The words PASS and WORD will flash on the scrolling marquee. Press for the digits 1111 to be displayed. On the Navigator, press Enter Password and 1111 will be displayed. The default password is 1111. Use the arrow keys to change each number if required and press to accept the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password.

Changing Service Password

— The password can only be changed through CCN operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS™, ComfortVIEW™, and Service Tool. Caution should be exercised when changing the password. Once changed, the only way to determine the password is through one of these devices. To view or change the password, use the CCN Variable PASSWORD found in Service Configuration/Display.

CONTROLS

General —

ComfortLink electronic control system that controls and monitors all operations of the chiller.

The control system is composed of several components as listed in the sections below. See Fig. 2 for a typical control box drawing. See Fig. 3 and 4 for power and control schematics. See Table 6 for drawing designation.

The 30MP liquid scroll chillers contain the

Main Base Board (MBB) — See Fig. 5. The MBB is

the heart of the ComfortLink control system. It contains the major portion of operating software and controls the operation of the machine. The MBB continuously monitors input/output channel information received from its inputs and from all other modules. The MBB receives inputs from the discharge and suction pressure transducers and thermistors. See Table 7. The MBB also receives the feedback inputs from each compressor current sensor board and other status switches. See Table 8. The MBB also controls several outputs. Relay outputs controlled by the MBB are shown in Table 9. Information is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network). The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network) bus is also supported. Connections to both LEN and CCN buses are made at the LVT (low voltage terminal).

The Instance Jumper must be on “1.”

AUX Board (AUX) — The AUX board is used with the

digital scroll option (020-045 only). It provides additional inputs and outputs for digital scroll control. See Fig. 6.

Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM

module is available as a factory-installed option or as a fieldinstalled accessory. The EMM module receives 4 to 20 mA inputs for the leaving fluid temperature reset, cooling set point and demand limit functions. The EMM module also receives

the switch inputs for the field-installed 2-stage demand limit and ice done functions. The EMM module communicates the status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to the inputs received.

Current Sensor Board (CSB) — The CSB is used to

monitor the status of the compressors by measuring current and providing an analog input to the main base board (MBB).

Expansion Valve (EXV) Board (050-071 only) —

directly controls the expansion valves to maintain the correct compressor superheat.

The EXV board communicates with the MBB and

Enable/Off/Remote Control Switch — The Enable/

Off/Remote Control switch is a 3-position switch used to control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position the chiller is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off position to shut the chiller down. Move the switch to the Remote Control position and a field-installed dry contact can be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of handling a 24 vac, 50-mA load. In the Enable and Remote Control (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN configuration and set point data. See Fig. 7.

Emergency On/Off Switch — The Emergency On/Off

switch should only be used when it is required to shut the chiller off immediately. Power to the MBB, EMM, EXV, AUX, and marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all outputs from these modules will be turned off. See Fig. 7.

Board Addresses — The main base board (MBB) has a

3-position instance jumper that must be set to 1. The EMM and EXV board has 4-position DIP switches. All switches are set to ON for all boards except the AUX board. The AUX board DIP switch settings are shown on the wiring schematic.

Control Module Communication

RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs. During initial power-up the LED will signal a followed by a pause. This indicates that the processor is booting. If this pattern repeats, it is an indication that the control board is in a continuous reboot loop and the board should be replaced. When operating correctly, the red status LEDs should be blinking in unison at a rate of once every 2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that the main control is supplied with the current software. If necessary, reload current software. If the problem still persists, replace the control board. A red LED that is lit continuously or blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the control board should be replaced.

GREEN LED — The MBB has one green LED. The Local Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking whenever power is on. All other boards have a LEN LED which should be blinking whenever power is on. Check LEN connections for potential communication errors at the board J3 and/or J4 connectors. Communication between modules is accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module. The J4 connector on the MBB provides both power and communication directly to the marquee display only.

YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) LED will blink during times of network communication.

/2-second blink 3 times,

Table 6 — Component, Power, and Control Drawings

30MPA,MPW UNIT DESCRIPTION LOCATION

Component Arrangement Fig. 2, page 9

015

020

030

040

045

050

055

060

065

071

Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 3, page 10 Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 4, page 11 Component Arrangement Fig. 2, page 9

Power Wiring Schematic Fig. 3, page 10 Control Wiring Schematic Fig. 4, page 11

LEGEND FOR FIG. 3-5

ALMR — Alarm Relay AUX — Auxilliary C—Contactor, Compressor CB — Circuit Breaker CCB — Compressor Circuit Breaker CCH — Crankcase Heater Relay CNFS — Condenser Water Flow Switch CNPI — Condenser Pump Interlock COMP — Compressor CR — Control Relay CSB — Current Sensing Board CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch DGS — Digital Scroll Compressor DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor DUS — Digital Unloader Solenoid EMM — Energy Management EXV — Expansion Valve Board/Electronic Expansion Valve FB — Fuse Block FIOP — Factory-Installed Option FU — Fuse GND — Ground HPS — High-Pressure Switch LLSV — Liquid Line Solenoid Valve LON — Local Operating Network LVT — Low Voltage Terminal LWT — Leaving Water Temperature MBB — Main Base Board MLV — Minimum Load Valve MP — Modular Motor Protection

MTT — Motor Temperature Thermistor NEC — National Electrical Code OAT — Outdoor-Air Thermistor OPT — Option PL — Plug RGT — Return Gas Temperature SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer SW — Switch TB — Terminal Block TRAN — Transformer UPC — Unitary Protocol Converter

Terminal Block Terminal (Unmarked)

Terminal (Marked) Splice Factory Wiring

Field Wiring Accessory or Option Wiring To indicate common potential only; not to represent

wiring.

Fig. 2 — Typical Control Box — 30MP015-071 Units

a30-5984

Fig. 3 — Typical Power Wiring Schematic — 30MP015-071 Units

Fig. 4 — Typical Control Wiring Schematic — 30MP015-071 Units

ACCESSORY ALARM RELAY AUXILIARY CONTACTOR, COMPRESSOR CIRCUIT BREAKER COMPRESSOR CIRCUIT BREAKER CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK CRANKCASE HEATER CRANKCASE HEATER RELAY COOLER ENTERING FLUID TEMP COOLER LEAVING FLUID TEMP CONDENSER FLOW SWITCH CONDENSER PUMP INTERLOCK COMPRESSOR CONTROL RELAY CURRENT SENSING BOARD CHILLED WATER TEMP CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK DIGITAL SCROLL DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR DIGITAL UNLOADER SOLENOID ENTERING FLUID TEMPERATURE ENERGY MANAGEMENT ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE FUSE BLOCK FACTORY INSTALLED OPTION FUSE GROUND HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE LIQUID LINE SOLENOID VALVE LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE MAIN BASE BOARD MINIMUM LOAD VALVE MODULAR MOTOR PROTECTOR MOTOR TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR OPTION PLUG RELAY RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER SWITCH TERMINAL BLOCK TRANSFORMER UNITARY PROTOCOL CONVERTER

ACCSY ALMR AUX C CB CCB CCN CH CCH CEFT CLFT CNFS CNPI COMP CR CSB CWP CWFS CWPI DGS DLS DPT DTT DUS EFT EMM EWT FB FIOP FU GND HPS LEN LFT LLSV LVT LWT MBB MLV MP MTT OAT OFM OPT PL R RGT SEN SPT SW TB TRAN UPC

TERMINAL BLOCK TERMINAL (UNMARKED) TERMINAL (MARKED) SPLICE FACTORY WIRING FIELD WIRING ACCESSORY OR OPTION WIRING TO INDICATE COMMON POTENTIAL ONLY, NOT TO REPRESENT WIRING

LEGEND

TO MULTI-CHILLER

CONTROLLER ACCESSORY

PANEL IN A DAISY CHAIN

CONFIGURATION (IF APPLICABLE)

CEPL130346-01

STATU S

LEN

J10

CCN

RED LED - STATU S GREEN LED -

LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

YELLOW LED CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK)

INSTANCE JUMPER

K11

K10 K9

K3 K2

2 1

Fig. 5 — Main Base Board

NOTE: Not to scale.

100K

CH1

CH2 CH3

CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8

STAT US SIO (LEN)

LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER

24 VAC

CH13 CH14

CH9

CH10

CH11

CH12

JP2

C61

CH13

D12

JP1

U21

Q10

Q11

U10

Q12

Q60

3 2 1

– G +

3 2 1

– G +

DIP SWITCH

J7 J8

CEPL130567-03

32GB500 442 EE

Fig. 6 — AUX Board

NOTE: Not to scale.

Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface —

Fig. 7 — Scrolling Marquee, Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, and

Emergency On/Off Switch Locations

LEGEND

CB — Circuit Breaker SW — Switch

Fig. 8 — CCN Wiring Diagram

The 30MP chiller units can be connected to the CCN if desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed in the field. See Table 10. The system elements are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The positive pin of each system element communication connector must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on either side of it. This is also required for the negative and signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at LVT See Fig. 8 and consult the CCN Contractor’s Manual for further information.

NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon*, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of –20 C to 60 C is required. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413 or 5463), American (A22503), Belden (8772), or Columbia (02525) meets the above mentioned requirements.

It is important when connecting to a CCN communication bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used

for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different colored wires.

At each system element, the shields of its communication bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the communication bus cable exits from one building and enters another, the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to the network:

1. Turn off power to the control box.

2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white (ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropriate colors for different colored cables.)

3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on LVT of the plug, the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the (–) terminal.

4. The RJ14 CCN connector on LVT can also be used, but is only intended for temporary connection (for example, a laptop computer running Service Tool).

SCROLLING MARQUEE

ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH

DISPLAY

CB1

SW1 OFF

CB2 CB3

REMOTE

CONTROL

ENABLE

EMERGENCY ON-OFF SWITCH

OFF

SW2

* Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont.

IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some routines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the bus.

Table 7 — Thermistor Designations

SCROLLING

MARQUEE

THERMISTOR

DISPLAY

NAME CLWT J8-13,14 (MBB) Cooler Leaving Fluid Temp CEWT J8-11,12 (MBB) Cooler Entering Fluid Temp

D.GAS

RGT.A

OAT/DLWT

SPT

CDET

CDLT

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature MBB — Main Base Board

CONNECTION

POINT

J6-1,2 (AUX2) Discharge Temperature

J8-9,10 (MBB) Circuit A Return Gas

J8-6,7 (MBB), LVT-21,22

J8-5,6 (MBB) LVT-22,23

J8-1,2 (MBB) Condenser Entering Fluid

J8-3,4 (MBB) Condenser Leaving Fluid

THERMISTOR INPUT

Thermistor (DTT)(Digital Compressor Option Only for unit size 020-045)

Temperature (accessory, standard for unit sizes 050-071)

Outdoor-Air Temperature Sensor (accessory) or Dual LWT Sensor

Accessory Remote Space Temperature Sensor, T55 Accessory

Temperature Sensor (30MPW Only)

Table 8 — Status Inputs

STATUS SWITCH PIN CONNECTION POINT

Condenser Flow Switch LVT-11,17, J7-2, J6-2 (MBB)

Dual Set Point LVT-12,13, J7-3,4 (MBB)

Remote On/Off LVT-14,15, J7,8 (MBB) Cooler Flow Switch Interlock LVT-16,17, J6-2, J7-10 (MBB) Compressor Fault Signal, A1 J9-11,12 (MBB) Compressor Fault Signal, A2 J9-5,6 (MBB) Compressor Fault Signal, A3 J9-8,9 (MBB)

Table 9 — Output Relays

RELAY

NO.

K1 Energize Compressor A1 K2 Energize Compressor A2 K3 Energize Compressor A3 K4 Energize Minimum Load Valve K7 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve K8 Crankcase Heater Relay

K9 Chilled Water Pump K10 Condenser Fan/Pump K11 Alarm Relay

DESCRIPTION

Table 10 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring

MANUFACTURER

Alpha 1895 — American A21451 A48301 Belden 8205 884421 Columbia D6451 — Manhattan M13402 M64430 Quabik 6130 —

Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring

PART NO.

CURRENT SENSING BOARD (CSB) — The CSB is used to monitor the status of each compressor by measuring current and providing an analog input to the main base board (MBB) or compressor expansion module (CXB).

ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH — The Enable/Off/Remote Control switch is a 3-position switch used to control the unit. When switched to the Enable position, the unit is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off position to shut the unit down. Move the switch to the Remote Control position and a field-installed dry contact can be used to start the unit. The contacts must be capable of handling a 24 vac, 50 mA load. In the Enable and Remote Control (dry contacts closed) positions, the unit is allowed to operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN configuration and set point data. See Fig. 7.

EMERGENCY ON/OFF SWITCH — The Emergency On/ Off switch should only be used when it is required to shut the unit off immediately. Power to the MBB, CXB, AUX, EMM, and scrolling marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all outputs from these modules will be turned off. See Fig. 7.

HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (HPS) — Each unit is protected with a high pressure switch to prevent excessive condensing pressure. See Table 11 for switch details.

Table 11 — High Pressure Switch

CARRIER PART

NUMBER

HK02ZZ001*

HK02ZZ003

* Available for 30MPA,MPW015-045, 30MPA050-071, 30MPW050071 high condensing option.

OPENS AT CLOSES AT

650 ± 10 psig

(4482 ± 69 kPa)

558 ± 15 psig

(384 ± 103 kPa)

500 ± 15 psig

(3447 ± 103 kPa)

435 ± 29 psig

(2999 ± 200 kPa)

PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each refrigerant circuit is equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer. The suction pressure transducers have a yellow body with a pressure range of –6.7 to 420 psig (–46 to 2896 kPa) while the discharge transducers have a red body with a pressure range of

14.5 to 667 psig (100 to 4599 kPa). These inputs connect to the MBB (main base board) and are used to monitor the status of the unit and to ensure the unit operates within the compressor envelope. The transducers are used to protect the compressor from operating at too low or too high of a pressure condition. In some cases, the unit may not be able to run at full capacity. The MBB will automatically reduce the capacity of a circuit as needed to maintain specified maximum/minimum operating pressures. Table 12 summarizes pressure transducer characteristics.

Table 12 — Pressure Transducer Identification

ENTER

Fig. 9 — Space Temperature Sensor

Typical Wiring (33ZCT55SPT)

TRANSDUCER

Discharge HK05ZZ001 Red

Suction HK05SZ003 Yellow

CARRIER

PART NUMBER

BODY

COLOR

PRESSURE

RANGE,

psi (kPa)

14.5 to 667

(100 to 4599)

–6.7 to 420

(–46 to 2896)

Sensors — The electronic control uses 2 to 8 thermistors to

sense temperatures for controlling chiller operation. See Table 7. These sensors are outlined below. Thermistors cooler leaving fluid, cooler entering fluid, discharge temperature, circuit A return gas temperature, outdoor-air temperature sensor or dual LWT sensor, accessory remote space temperature sensor, condenser entering fluid temperature sensor, and condenser leaving fluid temperature sensor are identical in temperature versus resistance and voltage drop performance. All thermistors are 5,000 ohmsat 77 F (25 C) except the space temperature thermistor which is 10,000 ohms. Space temperature thermistor (SPT) is 10,000 ohms at 77 F (25 C). See Thermistors section on page 46 for temperature-resistancevoltage drop characteristics.

COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (LWT) — The thermistor is installed in a well in the factory-installed leaving fluid piping connecting to the bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.

COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (EWT) — The thermistor is installed in a well in the factory-installed entering fluid piping connecting to the top of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.

CONDENSER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (CDLT) (30MPW Only) — The thermistor is installed in a well in the field-installed leaving fluid piping connecting to the bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger. The thermistor and well are a field-installed accessory. The thermistor and well are a fieldinstalled accessory. See Table 13 for thermistor and well part numbers. This sensor must be enabled, Configura-

tion



OPT1CDWS= ENBL.

CONDENSER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (CDET) (30MPW Only) — The thermistor is installed in a well in the field-installed entering fluid piping connecting to the top of the brazed-plate heat exchanger. See Table 13 for thermistor and well part numbers.

Table 13 — Thermistors and Wells

THERMISTOR

PART NO.

HH79NZ014

HH79NZ029

00PPG0000B105A

COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR (RGT.A) — This accessory thermistor can be installed in a well located in the suction line. Use Carrier part number HH79NZ029. This thermistor is standard for unit sizes 050-

071. For 015-045 this accessory must be enabled, Configura-

tion



OPT1RG.EN = ENBL.

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT) — This sensor is an accessory that is remotely mounted and used for outdoor air temperature reset. See Table 7. Use Carrier part number HH79NZ023. If sensor is attached, it must be enabled, (Configuration



cast information.

Outside Air Temperature can be forced to a value at the scrolling marquee or Navigator device. To force the value, access the parameter Temperatures

to view the current value. Press again and

use the up and down arrow keys to display the desired value;

DESCRIPTION WELL PART NO.

3 in., 5,000 ohm

Thermistor

4 in., 5,000 ohm

Thermistor

1-1/2 in.,5,000 ohm

Thermistor

10HB50106801

10HB50106802

00PPG00000B000A

OPT1OAT.E=ENBL) and include broad-



UNITOAT. Press

then press to accept the value. On the scrolling marquee, the “.” in the lower right corner will flash. On the Navigator device, a flashing “f” will be displayed next to the value. To clear the forced value, press followed by the up and down arrow keys simultaneously. The value will revert to the actual reading and the flashing “.” or “f” will be removed.

DUAL LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR (DLWT) — This input can be connected to the LVT. See Table 7. For dual chiller applications (parallel only are supported), connect the dual chiller leaving fluid temperature sensor (see Table 13 for thermistor and well part numbers) to the outside air temperature input of the Master chiller. If outside-air temperature is required for reset applications, connect the sensor to the Slave chiller and configure the slave chiller to broadcast the value to the Master chiller. The broadcast must be enabled, (Configuration



BCSTOAT.B=ON). If there are

only two units, the master chiller must be configured to acknowledge the broadcast (Configuration



BCSTBC.AK

=ON). If there are more than two units, at least one unit must be configured to acknowledge the broadcast (Configura-

tion



BCSTBC.AK =ON).

DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (DTT) — This sensor is only used on units with a digital compressor. The sensor is mounted on the discharge line close to the discharge of the digital compressor. It attaches to the discharge line using a spring clip and protects the system from high discharge gas temperature when the digital compressor is used. This sensor is a connected to the AUX board.

SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR — Space temperature sensors are used to measure the interior temperature of a building.

Space Temperature can be forced to a value at the scrolling marquee or Navigator device. To force the value, access the parameter Temperatures



UNITSPT. Press to

view the current value. Press again and use the up and down arrow keys to display the desired value; then press

to accept the value. On the scrolling marquee, the “.” in the lower right corner will flash. On the Navigator device, a flashing “f” will be displayed next to the value. To clear the forced value, press followed by the up and down arrow keys simultaneously. The value will revert to the actual reading and the flashing “.” or “f” will be removed.

The following type of SPT sensor is available:

• Space temperature sensor (33ZCT55SPT) with timed

override button (see Fig. 9)

TIMED OVERRIDE

BUTTON (SW1)

SW1

SEN

RED(+)

WHT(GND)

BLK(-)

BRN (GND) BLU (SPT)

CCN COM

SENSOR WIRING

All of the above sensors are 10,000 ohms at 77 F (25 C),

SPT (T10) PART NO. 33ZCT55SPT

SENSOR

SEN

LVT

Fig. 10 — Typical Space Temperature

Sensor Wiring

T-55 SPACE SENSOR

CCN+

CCN GND

CCN-

TO CCN COMM 1 BUS (PLUG) AT UNIT

Fig. 11 — CCN Communications Bus Wiring

to Optional Space Sensor RJ11 Connector

Type II thermistors and are connected to the low voltage terminal (LVT). The sensor should be mounted approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) from the floor in an area representing the average temperature in the space. Allow at least 4 ft (1.2 m) between the sensor and any corner. Mount the sensor at least 2 ft (0.6 m) from an open doorway.

Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to terminals in the unit main control box. The space temperature sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female connector. The RJ11 connector is used for access into the Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN) at the sensor.

To connect the space temperature sensor (Fig. 10):

1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for the application, connect 1 wire of the twisted pair to one SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other SEN terminal located under the cover of the space temperature sensor.

2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 3 and 4 on LVT located in the unit control box.

Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11 connector into the CCN (Fig. 11):

IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 10 for acceptable wiring.

1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white (ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)

2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the space temperature sensor terminal block.

3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of the space temperature sensor.

4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the space temperature sensor.

5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to the remainder of the CCN communication bus.

In lieu of a single sensor providing space temperature, an averaging sensor array of either 4 or 9 sensors may be employed to provide a space temperature as shown in Fig. 12. With this control scheme, only T55 space temperature sensors (P/N 33ZCT55SPT) can be used. Total sensor wiring must not exceed 1,000 ft (305 m).

NOTE: The Timed Override feature from a space temperature sensor requires a single space temperature sensor connected to the unit. This feature does not function when used with averaging space temperature sensor arrays.

Energy Management Module (Fig. 13) — This

factory-installed option (FIOP) or field-installed accessory is used for the following types of temperature reset, demand limit, and/or ice features:

• 4 to 20 mA leaving fluid temperature reset (requires field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)

• 4 to 20 mA cooling set point (requires field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)

• Discrete inputs for 2-step demand limit (requires fieldsupplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac, 50 mA load)

• 4 to 20 mA demand limit (requires field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)

• Discrete input for Ice Done switch (requires fieldsupplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac, 50 mA load)

See the Temperature Reset and Demand Limit sections on

pages 31 and 34 for further details.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufacturer’s control systems due to possible power supply differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. The two different power supplies cannot be mixed. ComfortLink controls use half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge signal generating device is used.

Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection — A proof-of-

cooler flow device is factory installed in all chillers.

Condenser Flow Protection — A proof-of-condens-

er flow protection accessory can be field installed in the condenser water piping of all chillers. The unit must be configured for the input to be enabled, Configuration



OPT1



D.FL.S=ENBL.

Thermostatic Expansion Valves (TXV) — All

30MP015-045 units are equipped from the factory with conventional TXVs. Two styles of TXVs are employed. The 30MPA units utilize a 15% bleed port type valve. The 30MPW units do not require a bleed port type valve. The 30MPA units and 30MPW units with medium temperature brine also have factory-installed liquid line solenoids. The liquid line solenoid valves are not intended to be a mechanical shut-off.

The TXV is set at the factory to maintain approximately 8 to 12° F (4.4 to 6.7° C) suction superheat leaving the cooler by monitoring the proper amount of refrigerant into the cooler. All TXVs are adjustable, but should not be adjusted unless abso- lutely necessary.

Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) — All

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

RED

SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3 SENSOR 4

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

SENSOR 2

SENSOR 1

RED

BLK

SENSOR 3

SENSOR 4

BLK

RED

BLK

SENSOR 8

SENSOR 9

SENSOR 5

RED BLK

SENSOR 6

SENSOR 7

BLK

RED

SPACE TEMPERATURE AVERAGING — 4 SENSOR APPLICATION

Fig. 12 — Space Temperature Averaging

LEGEND

Factory Wiring Field Wiring

SPACE TEMPERATURE AVERAGING — 9 SENSOR APPLICATION

30MP050-071 units are equipped from the factory with EXVs.

The 30MPA and 30MPW units with medium brine temperature brine also have the EXV set at the factory to maintain 9°F (5° C) suction superheat leaving the cooler by metering the proper amount of refrigerant into the cooler.

The EXV is designed to limit the cooler saturated suction temperature to 50 F (12.8 C). This makes it possible for the unit to start at high cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the compressor.

Capacity Control — Capacity control is determined by

the difference between the leaving fluid temperature and the Control Point (Run Status change. The Control Point (CTPT) is the current set point modified by a temperature reset command. This can be from the temperature reset function or the dual chiller routine. The capacity control routine runs every 30 seconds. The algorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired set point. Additionally, the control calculates a rise per stage knowing which compressor is on, its capacity and the temperature difference across the cooler (entering fluid temperature minus leaving fluid temperature) to determine the best time to turn on or off the next compressor, institute Minimum Load Control, or change the digital response, if equipped. Entering and Leaving fluid temperatures can be monitored at the unit's interface device Run Status LWT. With this information, a capacity ratio is calculated to determine whether to make any changes to the current stage of capacity. This ratio, Capacity Load/Unload Factor (Run Sta-

tus



VIEWLOD.F) value ranges from –100% to +100%

times Deadband Multiplier (Configuration



VIEWEWT and Run StatusVIEW



VIEWCTPT) and its rate of



SLCTZ.GN).

See Deadband Multiplier on this page for more information. If the next stage of capacity is a compressor, the control starts (stops) a compressor when the ratio reaches +100% (–100%) times Deadband Multiplier (Z.GN). Once a change in capacity occurs, a 90-second time delay is initiated and the capacity stage is held during this time delay.

When the unit is at stage zero (Requested Stage Run Sta-

tus



VIEWSTGE=0) as part of the capacity control routine,

the control adds a 1.2 factor on adding the first stage to reduce cycling.

If the unit is equipped with a digital compressor, it is normally the first compressor started. If the lead compressor is a digital compressor, and is enabled and available (not in alarm), the compressor will start fully loaded for 90 seconds prior to starting to cycle between loaded and unloaded. Once the digital compressor is on, positive changes in LOD.F will cause the compressor to load. Negative changes to LOD.F will cause the compressor to unload. This process can occur every 30 seconds. Changes to the digital loading are not subject to the 90second delay. See Digital Scroll Option on page 36 for additional information.

If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load Control, it will not be active until the unit is on its last stage of capacity. It too is treated as a stage of compression. As a result, Minimum Load Control will be activated when capacity is decreasing, Requested Stage STGE=1, and Capacity Load/Unload Factor LOD.F= -100% times Deadband Multiplier (Z.GN). See Table 14 for capacity step information.

MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed only in the network display tables (using Service Tool, ComfortVIEW™ or ComfortWORKS™ software) and

represents the amount of time to elapse before the unit will start

CEBD430351-0396-01C

TEST 1

CEPL130351-01

PWR

TEST 2

J4 J3

LEN

STATU S

RED LED - STATU S

GREEN LED LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

ADDRESS DIP SWITCH

Fig. 13 — Energy Management Module

its initialization routine. This value can be zero without the machine running in many situations. These can include being unoccupied, ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTROL switch in the OFF position, CCN not allowing unit to start, Demand Limit in effect, no call for cooling due to no load, and alarm or alert conditions present. If the machine should be running and none of the above are true, a minimum off time (DELY, see below) may be in effect. The machine should start normally once the time limit has expired.

MINUTES OFF TIME — The Minutes Off Time feature (Configuration



OPT2DELY) is a user-configurable time

period used by the control to determine how long unit operation is delayed after the unit has been enabled. This delay is initiated following the Enable-Off-Remote Switch being placed in “Enable” position or “Remote” with remote contacts closed, or if power is applied/restored to the unit with the Enable-Off-Remote Switch in a position that would allow the unit to operate. Typically, this time period is configured when multiple machines are located on a single site. For example, this gives the user the ability to prevent all the units from restarting at once after a power failure. A value of zero for this variable does not mean that the unit should be running.

If Minutes Off Time is active, the control will indicate Op-

erating Mode, Minutes Off Time Active (Operating

Modes



MODEMD10 will indicate YES).

CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following overrides will modify the normal operation of the routine.

Deadband Multiplier Multiplier (Configuration

— The user configurable Deadband



SLCTZ.GN) has a default

value of 1.0. The range is from 1.0 to 4.0. When set to other than 1.0, this factor is applied to the capacity Load/Unload Factor. The larger this value is set, the longer the control will delay between adding or removing stages of capacity. Figure 14 shows how compressor starts can be reduced over time if the leaving water temperature is allowed to drift a larger amount above and below the set point. This value should be set in the range of 3.0 to 4.0 for systems with small loop volumes.

First Stage Override

— If the current capacity stage is zero, the control will modify the routine with a 1.2 factor on adding the first stage to reduce cycling. This factor is also applied when the control is attempting to remove the last stage of capacity.

Slow Change Override

— The control prevents the capacity stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature is close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and moving towards the set point.

Table 14 — Part Load Data Percent Displacement, Standard Units

44 43

0 200 400 600 800 1000

TIME (SECONDS)

2 STARTS

3 STARTS

DEADBAND EXAMPLE

LWT (F)

MODIFIED DEADBAND

STANDARD DEADBAND

LWT (C)

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

Fig. 14 — Deadband Multiplier

30MP UNIT SIZE

015

020

030

040

045

050

055

060

065

071

*Minimum Load Valve energized. Minimum load valve will only be energized with decreasing capacity. Minimum load valve cannot be enabled with digital compressor operation on 30MP020-045 units.

CONTROL STAGE

(Run StatusVIEWSTGE)

1 50 50/18* 2 100 100 1 50 50/25* 2 100 100 1 50 50/34* 2 100 100 1 33 33/21* 267 67 3 100 100 1 33 33/22* 267 67 3 100 100 1 50 50/40* 2 100 100 1 44 44/35* 2 100 100 1 42 42/33* 2 100 100 1 38 38/31* 2 100 100 1 44 44/33* 2 100 100

WITHOUT MINIMUM LOAD VALVE

CAPACITY

(% Displacement)

NOTE: The capacity steps listed for the 30MP055-071 may vary from what is depicted due to the different size compressors used in the circuit.

CAPACITY

(% Displacement)

WITH MINIMUM LOAD VALVE

Ramp Loading — Ramp loading (Configuration SLCTCRMP) limits the rate of change of leaving fluid tem-

perature. If the unit is in a Cooling mode and configured for Ramp Loading, the control makes 2 comparisons before deciding to change stages of capacity. The control calculates a temperature difference between the control point and leaving fluid temperature. If the difference is greater than 4° F (2.2° C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more than the configured Cooling Ramp Loading value (CRMP), the control does not allow any changes to the current stage of capacity.

Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading entering fluid temperature is below the control point, the control will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being used. If exactly 25% cannot be removed, the control removes an amount greater than 25% but no more than necessary. The lowest stage will not be removed.

Minimum Load Control control is energized only when one compressor is running on the circuit and capacity is decreasing.

Cooler Freeze Protection shutting the chiller down on a Cooler Freeze Protection alarm

— When the

— If equipped, the minimum load

— The control will try to prevent



by removing stages of capacity. If the cooler fluid selected is Water, the freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C). If the cooler fluid selected is Brine, the freeze point is the Brine Freeze Point (Set

Points



FRZBR.FZ). This alarm condition (A207) only

references leaving fluid temperature and NOT Brine Freeze point. If the cooler leaving fluid temperature is less than the freeze point plus 2.0° F (1.1° C), the control will immediately remove one stage of capacity. This can be repeated once every 30 seconds.

Low Saturated Suction Protection prevent shutting a circuit down due to low saturated suction conditions by removing stages of capacity. The circuit alert

— The control will try to

condition (T116) compares saturated suction temperature to the configured Brine Freeze Point (Set Points



FRZBR.FZ).

The Brine Freeze point is a user-configurable value that must be left at 34 F (1.1 C) for fresh water systems. A lower value may be entered for systems with brine solutions, but this value should be set according to the freeze protection level of the brine mixture. Failure to properly set this brine freeze point value may permanently damage the brazed plate heat exchanger. The control will initiate Mode 7 (Circuit A) to indicate a

circuit’s capacity is limited and that eventually the circuit may shut down.

Time, Day, and Date — Many features of the 30MP

controls require that the time, day and date be properly set. This is especially helpful when troubleshooting alarms, as they are reported with a time and date stamp. ComfortLink controls also have the ability to automatically adjust for daylight savings time, when configured. The unit time and date is set at the factory based in the Eastern Time Zone.

To set the time, Time Clock Minute) is the item. The time clock is programmed in a 24hour format, 00.00 to 23.59. See Table 15.

To set the month, Time Clock is the item. This item follows the standard convention, 1=January, 2=February, etc.

To set the day of the month, Time Clock (Day of Month) is the item.

To set the day of the week, Time Clock (Day of Week) is the item. This item uses the following convention: 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, etc. This setting is important if using the internal schedule.

To set the year, Time Clock tury) is the item. This item follows the convention of a 4-digit year, such as 2014.



TIMEHH.MM (Hour and



DATEMNTH (Month)



DATEDOM



DATEDAY



DATEYEAR (Year of Cen-

Table 16 lists the required configurations for these settings.

TIME/DATE BROADCAST — The 30MP unit controls have the ability to broadcast the time and date on the network. If the CCN Time/Date Broadcast configuration Configura-

tion



BCSTT.D.BC=ON, the control will send the time and

date out onto the CCN bus once a minute. If this device is on a CCN network, it is important to make sure that only one device on the bus has this configuration set to ON. If more than one time broadcaster is present, problems with the time will occur. If the unit is installed on a network, another unit must be configured to be Broadcast Acknowledger, Configu-

ration



BCSTBC.AK. Only one unit can be the Broadcast

Acknowledger. See Table 17 for required configurations. DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME — The 30MP controls have

the ability to automatically adjust the time for daylight savings time. To utilize this feature, several items must be configured, including a start date and time to add as well as an end date. All items are found in the Daylight Saving Time sub-mode,

Time Clock tion



DST and the Broadcast sub-mode, Configura-

BCST. See Table 18 for required configurations.

NOTE: Only the time and date broadcaster can perform daylight savings time adjustments. Even if the unit is stand-alone, the user may want to set Configuration



BCSTT.D.BC to

ON to accomplish the daylight savings function. To disable the daylight savings time feature, set T.D.BC to OFF.

Table 15 — Time Required Configuration

TIME CLOCK MODE

SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

TIME HH.MM XX.XX Hour and Minute

24-hour format Range: 00.00 to 23.59

Table 16 — Day and Date Required Configurations

TIME CLOCK MODE

SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

Range: 1-12 (1=January, 2=February, etc.)

Range: 1-7 (1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.)

DATE

MNTH XX Month of Year

DOM XX Day of Month Range: 1-31

DAY X Day of Week

YEAR XXXX Year of Century

Table 17 — Broadcast Required Configurations

CONFIGURATION MODE

SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

T.D.BC ON/OFF CCN Time/Date Broadcast

BCST

BC.AK ON/OFF CCN Broadcast Ack'er

*Only the time and date broadcaster can perform daylight savings time adjustments. Even if the unit is stand-alone, the user may want to set this to ON to accomplish the daylight savings function.

Default: Off Must be set to ON to enable automatic Daylight Savings Time correction.*

Default: Off One unit on the network must be set to ON. The broadcast unit cannot be the acknowledger.

Table 18 — Daylight Savings Required Configurations

TIME CLOCK MODE

SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

Daylight Savings Start Month

STR.M XX Month

STR.W X Week

STR.D X Day

DST

BCST T.D.BC ON/OFF CCN Time/Date Broadcast

MIN.A XX Minutes to Add

STP.M XX Month

STP.W X Week

STP.D X Day

MIN.S XX Minutes to Subtract

CONFIGURATION MODE

Operation of Machine Based on Control Method — This term refers to how the machine is started

and stopped. Several control methods are available to enable and disable the unit. Machine On/Off control is determined by the configuration of the Control Method, Configura-

tion



OPT2CTRL.

ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTROL — With the control method set to Enable-Off-Remote Contact, CTRL=0 (Switch), simply switching the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch to the Enable or Remote Control position with external contacts closed will place the unit in an occupied state.

Under normal operation, the Control Mode (Run Sta-

tus



VIEWSTAT ) will be 1 (Off Local) when the switch is

in the Off position or in the Remote Control position with external contacts open, and will be 5 (On Local) when in the Enable position or Remote Control position with external contacts closed.

OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE — With the control method set to Occupancy, CTRL=2 (Occupancy), the Main Base Board will use the operating schedules as defined under the Time

Clock mode in the scrolling marquee display. If Time Clock



SCH.N (Schedule Number) is set to 0, the unit will

remain in an occupied mode continuously.

In either case, and whether operating under a Local Sched-

ule or under a CCN Schedule, under normal operation, Run

Status



VIEWSTAT (Control Mode) will be 1 (Off Local)

when the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch is Off or in Remote Control with the external contacts open. The control mode will be 3 (Off Time) when the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch is in Enable or Remote Control with external contacts closed and the time of day is during an unoccupied period. Similarly, the control mode will be 7 (On Time) when the time of day is during an occupied period.

Local Schedule

— Local Schedules are defined by schedule

the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch must be in the Enable or Remote Control position with external contacts closed.

For this option to function properly, the correct time, day and date must be set. See the section Time, Day, and Date on page 20. The time clock is programmed in a 24-hour format,

00.00 to 23.59. If configured, the 30MP controls can automatically adjust the time for daylight savings time. See the section Daylight Savings Time on page 20.

If holidays are to be used, they must be configured. Thirty holidays are provided as part of the local schedules, HD.01 through HD.30. Each holiday requires a Holiday Month, Time

Clock



HOL.LHD.xxMON (Holiday Start Month)

where “xx” is a number from 01 to 30; the Holiday Start Day of Month, Time Clock where “xx” is a number from 01 to 30; and the Holiday Duration, Time Clock where “xx” is a number from 1 to 99. Holidays that do not occur on fixed dates will require annual programming.

In the example shown in Table 19, the following holidays are to be programmed: January 1 for one day, July 4 for one day, December 24 for two days.

Eight separate time periods, Period 1 through 8, are available as part of the local schedule. Each period has Monday through Sunday and a Holiday day flag, and occupied and unoccupied times. For example, an occupied time from 6:00 AM to 8:00 PM is desired from Monday through Friday. For Saturday an occupied period from 6:00 AM to 12:00 Noon is desired. On Sunday and holidays the unit is to remain unoccupied. This schedule is shown graphically in Fig. 15.

To program this schedule, Time Clock Number) must change from 0 to a number between 1 and 64. In this example, the Schedule Number will be 1. Two of the eight time periods are required to create this schedule. See Table 20.

Default: 4 (April) Range: 1 to 12 (1=January, 2=February, etc.)

Daylight Savings Start Week Default: 1 Range: 1 to 5

Daylight Savings Start Day Default: 7 (Sunday) Range: 1 to 7 (1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.)

Default: 60 Range: 0 to 99

Daylight Savings Stop Month Default: 10 (October) Range: 1 to 12 (1=January, 2=February, etc.)

Daylight Savings Stop Week Default: 5 Range: 1 to 5

Daylight Savings Stop Day Default: 7 (Sunday) Range: 1 to 7 (1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.)

Default: 60 Range: 0 to 99

Default: Off Must be set to ON to enable automatic Daylight Savings Time correction.



HOL.LHD.xxDAY (Start Day)



HOL.LHD.xxLEN (Duration [Days])

numbers from 1 to 64. All of these schedules are identical. The schedule number (Time Clock



SCH.N) must be set to a

number greater than 0 for local schedule. For unit operation,



SCH.N (Schedule

SUBMODE

HOL.L

SUB-

SUBMODE

HD.01

HD.02

HD.03

Table 19 — Holiday Required Configurations

TIME CLOCK MODE

ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

Default: 0

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day

LEN XX Duration (Days)

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day

LEN XX Duration (Days)

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day

LEN XX Duration (Days)

Range: 0 to 12 (0=Not Used, 1=January, 2=February, etc.)

Example = 1

Default: 0 Range: 0-31 (0=Not Used)

Example = 1

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99 (0=Not Used)

Example = 1

Default: 0 Range: 0-12 (0=Not Used, 1=January, 2=February, etc.)

Example = 7

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 31 (0=Not Used)

Example = 4

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99 (0=Not Used)

Example = 1

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 12 (0=Not Used, 1=January, 2=February, etc.)

Example = 12

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 31 (0=Not Used)

Example = 24

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99 (0=Not Used)

Example = 2

Table 20 — Occupancy Schedule Required Configurations

TIME CLOCK MODE

SUBMODE

SCH.N XX Schedule Number XX

SCH.L

SUB-

SUBMODE

PER.1

PER.2

ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

OCC.1 XX.XX Period Occupied Time

UNC.1 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time

MON.1 YES/NO Monday in Period

TUE.1 YES/NO Tuesday in Period

WED.1 YES/NO Wednesday in Period

THU.1 YES/NO Thursday in Period

FRI.1 YES/NO Friday in Period

SAT.1 YES/NO Saturday in Period

SUN.1 YES/NO Sunday in Period

HOL.1 YES/NO Holiday in Period

OCC.2 XX.XX Period Occupied Time

UNC.2 XX.XX Period Unoccupied Time

MON.2 YES/NO Monday in Period

TUE.2 YES/NO Tuesday in Period

WED.2 YES/NO Wednesday in Period

THU.2 YES/NO Thursday in Period

FRI.2 YES/NO Friday in Period

SAT.2 YES/NO Saturday in Period

SUN.2 YES/NO Sunday in Period

HOL.2 YES/NO Holiday in Period

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99

Example = 1

Default: 00.00 Range: 00.00 to 23.59

Example = 06.00

Default: 00.00 Range: 00.00 to 23.59

Example = 20.00

Default: NO

Example = YES

Default: NO

Example = YES

Default: NO

Example = YES

Default: NO

Example = YES

Default: NO

Example = YES

Default: NO

Example = NO

Default: NO

Example = NO

Default: NO

Example = NO

Default: 00.00 Range: 00.00 to 23.59

Example = 06.00

Default: 00.00 Range: 00.00 to 23.59

Example = 12.00

Default: NO

Example = NO

Default: NO

Example = NO

Default: NO

Example = NO

Default: NO

Example = NO

Default: NO

Example = NO

Default: NO

Example = YES

Default: NO

Example = NO

Default: NO

Example = NO

12:00 AM

3:00 AM

6:00 AM

9:00 AM

12:00 PM

3:00 PM

6:00 PM

9:00 PM

12:00 AM

MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY SUNDAY HOLIDAY

Fig. 15 — Example Schedule

LEGEND

— Occupied

CCN Global Schedule SCH.N from 65 to 99 indicate operation under a CCN Global Schedule. For unit operation based on a CCN Global Schedule, the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch must be in the Enable or Remote Control position with external contacts closed.

In the example in Table 21, the CCN Global Schedule the

unit is to follow is 65. To set up the unit to follow this schedule,

Time Clock



SCH.N must be modified.

Any unit can be the Global Schedule Broadcaster. When using a Global Broadcast Schedule, the schedule broadcaster must have the Global Schedule Broadcast, Configuration BCSTG.S.BC=ON and all other devices on the network

— Schedule Numbers, Time Clock



interface device, the number of hours requested must be set in

Time Clock

Table 22.

Once a non-zero value has been entered, the unit will resume an occupied period for the duration of the time programmed. The number of hours in the override time period will be displayed in OVR.T and will count down as the time period progresses. This value cannot be changed until the override period has expired or is cancelled. The override time period can be cancelled by changing the OVR.T value to 0. This can be done at the unit’s interface device or through CCN communications by writing to the point OVR_EXT.

should have their Global Schedule Broadcast flag set to

Configuration



BCSTG.S.BC=OFF. There can be only

one broadcaster of a specific schedule. The unit set to be the schedule broadcaster must have a schedule number from 65 to 99, and the Local Schedule configured as described above. It will broadcast the internal time schedule once every 2 minutes.

Table 21 — CCN Global Schedule Required

SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY

SCH.N XX

Timed Override

Configuration

TIME CLOCK MODE

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

Schedule

Number XX

COMMENT

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99

Example = 65

— There are several ways to override the occupancy schedule to keep the unit in an occupied period. Schedule overrides can be initiated at the unit’s interface with either the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ device, from a space temperature sensor equipped with a timed override button (see unit Installation Instructions for selection and wiring information), or through CCN communications. Initiation of an override period can only be accomplished if the unit is in an unoccupied period. If Timed Override is in effect, Operating

Modes



MODEMD06, Timed Override in Effect will be

active. Override expires after each initiation.

Timed Override from Scrolling Marquee/Navigator Device —

A timed override period can be initiated with the unit’s interface device. To initiate an override period from the unit’s

SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY

OVR OVR.T X

Timed Override from Space Temperature Sensor with Override Button — A timed override period can be initiated using a

space temperature sensor with an override button from the space.

NOTE: This feature requires a single space temperature sensor connected to the unit. It does not function when used with averaging space temperature sensor arrays.

To configure this feature, Time Clock (Override Time Limit) must be set to a non-zero value. This determines the maximum number of hours the override period can extend an occupied period when the override button is pushed. This item has a range of 0 to 4 hours and should be set to the limit desired for the override period. See Table 23.

Pressing the override button on the Space Temperature Sensor will initiate an override period. The override button must be pressed for 2 to 4 seconds for the control to acknowledge the call. The control will ignore a momentary press of the override button. However, if the override button is held for longer than 4 seconds, a Space Temperature Thermistor Failure alarm will be generated. The number of hours in the override time period



OVROVR.T (Timed Override Hours). See

Table 22 — Timed Override Required

Configuration

TIME CLOCK MODE

DESCRIPTION

Timed Override

ITEM

Hours

COMMENT

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 4



OVROVR.L



will be displayed in Time Clock

OVROVR.T (Timed

Override Hours) and will count down as the time period progresses. See Table 22.

Table 23 — Space Temperature Override Required

Configuration

TIME CLOCK MODE

SUBMODE ITEM DISPLAY

OVR OVR.L X

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

Override Time

LImit

COMMENT

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 4

Timed Override from CCN — A timed override period can be initiated through CCN communications by writing to the point OVR_EXT. This point has a range of 0 to 4 hours and should be set for the desired amount of time.

The number of hours in the override time period will be displayed in Time Clock



OVROVR.T (Timed Override

Hours) and will count down as the time period progresses. See Table 22.

CCN CONTROL — With the control method set to CCN Control, CTRL=3 (CCN), an external CCN device controls the On/Off state of the machine. This CCN device forces the point CHIL_S_S between Start/Stop to control the unit.

Under normal operation, Run Status



VIEWSTAT

(Control Mode) will be 1 (Off Local) when the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch is in the Off position or in the Remote Control position with the remote external contacts open. With the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch in the Enable position or in Remote Control position with the remote external contacts closed, the Control Mode will be 2 (Off CCN) when the CHIL_S_S variable is “Stop.” Similarly, the control mode will be 6 (On CCN) when the CHIL_S_S variable is “Start.”

Units controlled via communications by a separate thirdparty building automation system through a translator or UPC Open Controller must be set to CCN Control, CTRL=3. If the unit is to be monitored only via communications, CTRL=3 (CCN Control) is not required.

Emergency Stop

— A controls feature exists to shut down the machine in the event of an emergency. Writing to the CCN Point EMSTOP, the command “EMSTOP” will force the machine to stop all mechanical cooling immediately and shut down. While this feature is enabled, the Control Mode Run

Status



VIEWSTAT=4 (Emergency) will be displayed. For

the machine to operate normally, the EMSTOP point value should be “ENABLE.”

Cooling Set Point Select

SINGLE — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set Points

DUAL SWITCH — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set Points



COOLCSP.1).



COOLCSP.1) when the Dual Set

Point switch contacts are open and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set



Points

COOLCSP.2) when they are closed.

DUAL CCN OCCUPIED — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set Points



COOLCSP.1) during the

Occupied mode and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set

Points



COOLCSP.2) during the Unoccupied mode as

configured under the local occupancy schedule accessible only from CCN. Schedule Number in Table SCHEDOVR (see Appendix B) must be configured to 1. If the Schedule Number is set to 0, the unit will operate in a continuous 24-hr Occupied mode. Control method must be configured to 0 (switch). See Table 24.

4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Unit operation is based on an external 4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module (EMM).

Ice Mode — When Ice Mode is enabled, Cooling Setpoint

Select must be set to Dual Switch, Dual 7 day or Dual CCN Occupied and the energy management module (EMM) must be installed. Unit operation is based on Cooling Setpoint 1 (CSP.1) during the Occupied mode, Ice Setpoint (CSP.3) during the Unoccupied mode with the Ice Done contacts open and Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP.2) during the Unoccupied mode with the Ice Done contacts closed. These 3 set points can be utilized to develop your specific control strategy. Ice Mode is not compatible with the Multi-Chiller Controller Accessory Panel.

Table 24 illustrates how the control method and cooling set point select variables direct the operation of the chiller and the set point to which it controls. The illustration also shows the ON/OFF state of the machine for the given combinations.

Cooler Pump Control — The AquaSnap

30MP ma-

chines are configured with the Cooler Pump Control (Configu-

ration



OPT1CPC) = ON.

The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump Starter is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter coil is powered from the chiller control system. The starter should be wired between LVT 24 and TB3-1. If equipped, the field-installed chilled water pump starter auxiliary contacts should be connected in series with the chilled water flow switch between LVT 16 and LVT 17.

Alarm Routing — A CCN feature within the 30MP units

allows for alarm broadcasting. ALARM ROUTING CONTROL — Alarms recorded on

the 30MP unit can be routed through the CCN. To configure this option, the ComfortLink control must be configured to determine which CCN elements will receive and process alarms. Input for the decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or 1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system element that corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables alarm processing. The factory default is 00000000. See Figure 16. The default setting is based on the assumption that the unit will not be connected to a network. If the network does not contain a ComfortVIEW™, ComfortWORKS™, TeLink, DataLINK™, or BAClink module, enabling this feature will only add unnecessary activity to the CCN communication bus.

The CCN Point ALRM_CNT is the variable and can be modified with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool only. It cannot be modified with the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ display.

Typical configuration of the Alarm Routing variable is

11010000. This Alarm Routing status will transmit alarms to ComfortVIEW software, TeLink, BAClink, and DataLINK. Alarm routing is not supported with the LON Translator.

Table 24 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points

DESCRIPTION STATUS POINT

Alarm Routing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALRM_CNT

Building Supervisor,

ComfortVIEW™,

ComfortWORKS

™

BACnet Communications (UPC),

BACnet Translator

TeLink,

Autodial Gateway

Unused

Alarm Printer interface Module,

BACLink or DataLINK™

Unused

Fig. 16 — Alarm Routing Control

Control Type

(CTRL)

0 (Switch) —

1 or 2

(Occupancy)

3 (CCN)

* Energy management module (EMM) required for operation. † Dual set point switch input used. CSP1 used when switch input is open. CSP2 used when switch input is closed.

CCN Chiller

CHIL_S_S

—

Stop — — — — — Off

Start

Set Point Select

(CLSP)

0 (Single) — — — — CSP.1

1 (Dual Switch)†

2 (Dual CCN

Occupied)

3 (4 to 20 mA

Input)*

0 (Single)

1 (Dual Switch)†

(Dual CCN

Occupied)

3 (4 to 20 mA

Input)*

0 (Single) — — — — CSP.1

1 (Dual Switch)†

2 (Dual CCN

Occupied)

3 (4 to 20 mA

Input)*

Ice Mode

(ICE.M)*

— — OFF — CSP.1 — — ON — CSP.2

ENBL

— — — YES CSP.1 — — — NO CSP.2

ENBL

— — — — 4-20 mA

— — — YES CSP.1 —— —NOOff — — OFF YES CSP.1 — — ON YES CSP.2 —— —NOOff

ENBL

— — — — Illegal

— — — YES 4-20 mA —— —NOOff

— — OFF — CSP.1 — — ON — CSP.2

ENBL

— — — YES CSP.1 — — — NO CSP.2

ENBL

— — — — 4-20 mA

Ice Done Status

(ICED)*

— OFF — CSP.1

ON ON — CSP.2

OFF ON — CSP.3

— — YES CSP.1

ON — NO CSP.2

OFF — NO CSP.3

— OFF YES CSP.1 — ON YES CSP.2 ——NOOff

— OFF — CSP.1

ON ON — CSP.2

OFF ON — CSP.3

— — YES CSP.1

ON — NO CSP.2

OFF — NO CSP.3

Dual Set Point

Switch (DUAL)

Occupancy

State

(OCC)

Active Set

Point

(SETP)

ALARM EQUIPMENT PRIORITY — The ComfortVIEW software uses the equipment priority value to determine the order in which to sort alarms that have the same level. A priority of 0 is the highest and would appear first when sorted. A priority of 7 would appear last when sorted. For example, if two units send out identical alarms, the unit with the higher priority would be listed first. The default is 4. The CCN point EQP_TYPE is the variable and can be changed when using ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool only. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee or Navigator display.

COMMUNICATION FAILURE RETRY TIME — This variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to elapse between alarm retries. Retries occur when an alarm is not acknowledged by a network alarm acknowledger, which may be either ComfortVIEW software or TeLink. If acknowledgement is not received, the alarm will be re-transmitted after the number of minutes specified in this decision. The factory default for this item is 10 minutes with a range of 1 to 254 minutes. The CCN Point RETRY_TM is the variable and can be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool only. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee or Navigator display.

RE-ALARM TIME — This variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to elapse between re-alarms. A realarm occurs when the conditions that caused the initial alarm continue to persist for the number of minutes specified in this decision. Re-alarming will continue to occur at the specified interval until the condition causing the alarm is corrected. To disable this feature, set the variable to 255. The factory default is 30 minutes with a range of 1 to 254. The CCN Point REALARM is the variable and can be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool only. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee or Navigator display.

ALARM SYSTEM NAME — This variable specifies the system element name that will appear in the alarms generated by the unit control. The name can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters long and should be unique to the unit. The factory default is SPLIT. The CCN point ALRM_NAM is the variable and can be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool only. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee or Navigator display.

Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation — At any-

time the unit is in an ON status, as defined by the one of the following conditions, the cooler pump relay will be enabled.

1. The Enable-Off-Remote Switch in ENABLE, (CTRL=0).

2. Enable-Off-Remote Switch in REMOTE with a Start-Stop remote control closure (CTRL=0).

3. An Occupied Time Period from an Occupancy Schedule in combination with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=2).

4. A CCN Start-Stop Command to Start in combination with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=3).

Certain alarm conditions and Operating Modes will turn the cooler pump relay ON. This sequence will describe the normal operation of the pump control algorithm.

When the unit cycles from an ON state to an OFF state, the cooler pump output will remain energized for the Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (Configuration lay is configurable from 0 to 10 minutes. The factory default is 1 minute. If the pump output was deenergized during the transition period, the pump output will not be energized.

The Cooler Pump Relay will be energized when the machine is ON. The chilled water pump interlock circuit consists of a chilled water flow switch and a field-installed chilled water pump interlock. If the chilled water pump interlock circuit does not close within five (5) minutes of starting, an A200 - Cooler



OPT1PM.DY). The de-

Flow/Interlock failed to close at Start-Up alarm1 will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.

If the chilled water pump interlock or chilled water flow switch opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially being closed, an A201 - Cooler Flow 1 Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation alarm will be generated and the machine will stop.

Condenser Pump/Condenser Fan Output Control —

control either a condenser fan output or a condenser pump output depending on the unit configuration.

UNITTYPE = 2 (air cooled), then the output will be off as long as capacity is equal to 0 and will be energized 5 seconds before a compressor is started and remain energized until capacity is 0 again.

UNITTYPE = 3 (water cooled), then the output will be used for condenser pump control and additional configuration is required. To enable the condenser pump control, use Configura-

tion

pump control (0), on when occupied (1), and on when capacity is greater than 0 (2).

The main base board (MBB) has the capability to

If the unit is configured for Configuration



OPT1D.PM.E. The pump can be configured for no



Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control —

two units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. This control algorithm is designed for parallel fluid flow arrangement only. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller, the other as the slave. An additional leaving fluid temperature thermistor (Dual Chiller LWT) must be installed as shown in Fig. 17 and 18 and connected to the master chiller. Refer to Sensors section, page 15, for wiring. The CCN communication bus must be connected between the two chillers. Connections can be made to the CCN screw terminals on LVT. Refer to Carrier Comfort Network mation. Configuration examples are shown in Tables 25 and 26.

example the master chiller will be configured at address 1 and the slave chiller at address 2. The master and slave chillers must reside on the same CCN bus (Configuration



ration have Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (Configuration



uration

the master chiller and SLVE for the slave. Also in this example, the master chiller will be configured to use Lead/Lag Balance Select (Configuration ance Delta (Configuration chiller run-times weekly. The Lag Start Delay (Configura-

tion

will prevent the lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller has been at 100% capacity for the length of the delay time. Parallel configuration (Configuration only be configured to YES. The variables LLBL, LLBD and LLDY are not used by the slave chiller.

tion of Control Method (Configuration the Master chiller. The Slave chiller should always be configured for CTRL=0 (Switch). If the chillers are to be controlled by Remote Controls, both Master and Slave chillers should be enabled together. Two separate relays or one relay with two sets of contacts may control the chillers. The Enable/Off/ Remote Control switch should be in the Remote Control position on both the Master and Slave chillers. The Enable/Off/ Remote Control switch should be in the Enable position for CTRL=2 (Occupancy) or CTRL=3 (CCN Control).

The dual chiller routine is available for the control of

Interface section, page 13, for wiring infor-

Refer to Table 25 for dual chiller configuration. In this



CCN

RSET

CCNB) but cannot have the same CCN address (Configu-



CCNCCNA). Both master and slave chillers must

LLEN) configured to ENBL. Master/Slave Select (Config-



RSETMSSL) must be configured to MAST for



RSETLLBL) and Lead/Lag Bal-



RSETLLBD) to even out the



RSETLLDY) feature will be set to 10 minutes. This



RSETPARA) can

Dual chiller start/stop control is determined by configura-



OPT2CTRL) of

Table 25 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example)

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

CTRL CONTROL METHOD

OPT2

CTRL 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0

OPT2

CCN

CCNA 1 CCN ADDRESS DEFAULT 1

CCNB

CCN

CCNB 0 CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0

CCN

RSET

RSET CRST COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS

LLEN DSBL SCROLLING STOPS

DSBL VALUE FLASHES

ENBL SELECT ENBL

LLEN ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED

PROCEED TO

SUBMODE RESET

LLEN

MSSL MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

MSSL MAST MASTER /SLAVE SELECT DEFAULT MAST

MSSL

SLVA SLAVE ADDRESS

SLVA 0 SCROLLING STOPS

0 VALUE FLASHES

2 SELECT 2

SLVA 2 SLAVE ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED

SLVA

LLBL LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

LLBL 0 SCROLLING STOPS

0 VALUE FLASHES

2 SELECT 2 - Automatic

Table 25 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example) (cont)

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

RSET

NOTES:

1. Master Control Method (CTRL) can be configured as 0-Switch, 2-Occupancy or 3-CCN.

2. Parallel Configuration (PARA) cannot be changed.

LLBL 2 LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLBL

LLBD LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

LLBD 168 LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA DEFAULT 168

LLBD

LLDY LAG START DELAY

LLDY 5 SCROLLING STOPS

5 VALUE FLASHES

10 SELECT 10

LLDY 10 LAG START DELAY CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLDY

RSET

PARA YES MASTER COMPLETE

Table 26 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Slave Chiller Example)

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

CTRL CONTROL METHOD

OPT2

CTRL 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0

OPT2

CCN

CCNA

CCNA 1 CCN ADDRESS SCROLLING STOPS

1 VALUE FLASHES

CCN

CCNA 2 CCN ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED

CCN

CCNB 0 CCN BUS NUMBER

CCN

RSET

RSET CRST COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS

LLEN DSBL SCROLLING STOPS

DSBL VALUE FLASHES

ENBL SELECT ENBL

LLEN ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLEN

MSSL MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

SELECT 2

(SEE NOTE 2)

DEFAULT 0

(SEE NOTE 3)

PROCEED TO

SUBMODE RSET

MSSL MAST SCROLLING STOPS

MAST VALUE FLASHES

SLVE SELECT SLVE

MSSL SLVE MASTER /SLAVE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED

MSSL

RSET SLAVE COMPLETE

NOTES:

1. Slave Control Method (CTRL) must be configured for 0.

2. Slave CCN Address (CCNA) must be different than Master.

3. Slave CCN Bus Number (CCNB) must be the same as Master

4. Slave does not require SLVA, LLBL, LLBD, or LLDY to be configured.

Both chillers will stop if the Master chiller Enable/Off/

MASTER CHILLER

SLAVE

CHILLER

LEAVING FLUID

RETURN FLUID

THERMISTOR WIRING

INSTALL DUAL CHILLER LWT LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (T10) HERE*

*See Fig. 18 for thermistor and well part numbers.

Fig. 17 — Dual Chiller Thermistor Location

Fig. 18 — Dual Leaving Water Thermistor Well

PART

NUMBER

DIMENSIONS in. (mm)

A B 10HB50106801 3.10 (78.7) 1.55 (39.4) 10HB50106802 4.10 (104.1) 1.28 (32.5)

00PPG000008000A 2.32 (58.86) 1.31 (33.28)

1/4 N.P.T.

0.505/0.495

0.61 DIA

6” MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

10HB50106801 and 10HB50106802

Brass Well Thermistor — 00PPG000008000A

Remote Control switch is in the Off position. If the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Master chiller the Slave chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode. If the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Slave chiller the Master chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode.

The master chiller controls the slave chiller by changing its

Control Mode (Run Status



VIEWSTAT) and its operat-

ing setpoint or Control Point (Run Status

0.38

(9.53)

Temperature Reset — The control system is capable of

handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on return cooler fluid temperature. Because the change in temperature through the cooler is a measure of the building load, the return temperature reset is in effect an average building load reset method. The control system is also capable of temperature reset based on outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature (SPT), or from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. Accessory sensors must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT) and for OAT reset (HH79NZ014). The energy management module (EMM) must be used for temperature reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal. See Tables 27 and 28.



VIEWCT.PT).

0.25

(6.35)

IMPORTANT: Care should be taken when interfacing with other control systems due to possible power supply differences: full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. Connection of control devices with different power supplies may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink controls incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

To use outdoor air or space temperature reset, four variables must be configured. In the Configuration mode under the submode RSET, items (Configuration



RSETCRST),

(ConfigurationRSETRM.NO), (Configuration RSETRM.F), and (ConfigurationRSETRT.DG) must be properly set. See Table 29 — Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset. The outdoor air reset example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 85.0 F (29.4 C) outdoor-air temperature and 15.0 F (8.3 C) reset at

55.0 F (12.8 C) outdoor-air temperature. The space temperature reset example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 72.0 F (22.2 C) space temperature and 6.0 F (3.3 C) reset at 68.0 F (20.0 C) space temperature. The variable CRST should be configured for the type of reset desired. The variable RM.NO should be set to the temperature that no reset should occur. The variable RM.F should be set to the temperature that maximum reset is to occur. The variable RM.DG should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired. Figures 19 and 20 are examples of outdoor air and space temperature resets.

To use return reset, four variables must be configured. In the Configuration mode under the sub-mode RSET, items CRST, RT.NO, RT.F and RT.DG must be properly set. See Table 30 — Configuring Return Temperature Reset. This example provides 5.0 F (2.8 C) chilled water set point reset at 2.0 F (1.1 C) cooler T and 0° F (0° C) reset at 10.0 F (5.6 C) cooler T. The variable RT.NO should be set to the cooler temperature difference (T) where no chilled water temperature reset should occur. The variable RT.F should be set to the cooler temperature difference where the maximum chilled water temperature reset should occur. The variable RM.DG should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired.

To verify that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run Status mode, sub-mode VIEW, and subtract the Active Setpoint (Run Status Point (Run Status



VIEWSETP) from the Control



VIEWCTPT) to determine the degrees

reset.

Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the entering cooler fluid will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 21. Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point are selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the fluid temperature set point may be colder than required. If the leaving fluid temperature were allowed to increase at part load, the efficiency of the machine would increase.

Return fluid reset allows for the leaving temperature set point to be reset upward as a function of the return fluid temperature or, in effect, the building load (See Fig. 22).



Table 27 — Menu Configuration of 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Control

ENTER

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

CCN

CONFIGURATION

EXV.A

RSET

SLCT CLSP 0 COOLING SETPOINT SELECT

Table 28 — 4 to 20 mA Reset

SUB-MODE

RSET

NOTE: The example above shows how to configure the chiller for 4 to 20 mA reset. No reset will occur at 4.0 mA input, and a 5.0 F reset will occur at 20.0 mA. An EMM (energy management module) is required.

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

CRST 1

MA.DG

5.0 F

(2.8 C)

Table 29 — Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

0 Scrolling Stops

0 Flashing ‘0’

3Select ‘3’

3 Change Accepted

ITEM

EXPANSION

COOLING RESET

TYPE

DEGREES COOL

RESET

0 = no reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA input 2 = Outdoor air temp 3 = Return Fluid 4 = Space Temperature

Default: 0° F (0° C) Reset at 20 mA Range: –30 to 30 F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

COMMENT

MODE

(RED LED)

CONFIGURATION

KEYPAD

ENTRY

SUB-

MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

Outdoor

Air

Space

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

CCN

EXV.A

RSET CRST 2 4

RM.NO 85 F 72 F

RM.F 55 F 68 F

RM.DG 15 F6 F

ITEM

EXPANSION

COOLING RESET

TYPE

REMOTE - NO RESET TEMP

REMOTE - FULL

RESET TEMP

REMOTE - DEGREES

RESET

COMMENT

2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature (Connect to LVT-4,5) 4 = Space Temperature (Connect to LVT-3,4)

Default: 125.0 F (51.7 C) Range: 0° to125 F (–17.8 to 51.7 C)

Default: 0.0° F (-17.7 C) Range: 0° to 125 F (–17.8 to 51.7 C)

Default: 0° F (0° C) Range: –30 to 30 F (–16.7 to -16.7 C)

Table 30 — Configuring Return Temperature Reset

ENTER

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 19 — Outdoor-Air Temperature Reset

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 20 — Space Temperature Reset

LEGEND

Fig. 21 — Standard Chilled Fluid

Temperature Control — No Reset

EWT —

Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature

LWT —

Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

DESIGN RISE

EWT

LWT

LWT TEMPERATURE (F)

LWT TEMPERATURE (C)

12.2

11.1

10.0

8.9

7.8

6.7

5.6

010203040506070 80 90 100

% UNIT LOADING

SET POINT — 44 F DESIGN RISE — 10 F

Fig. 22 — Return Fluid Reset

MODE

(RED LED)

CONFIGURATION

KEYPAD

ENTRY

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

ITEM

EXPANSION

DISP TEST ON/OFF TEST DISPLAY LEDs

UNIT TYPE X UNIT TYPE

OPT1 FLUD X COOLER FLUID

OPT2 CTRL X CONTROL METHOD

CCN

EXV.A

RSET CRST 3 COOLING RESET TYPE

RT.NO 10.0 F

RT.F 2.0 F

RT.DG 5.0 F

RETURN FLUID - NO

RESET TEMP

RETURN FLUID - FULL

RESET TEMP

RETURN - DEGREES

RESET

COMMENT

0 = No Reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA Input (EMM required)

(Connect to EMM TB6-2,3) 2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature 3 = Return Fluid 4 = Space Temperature (Connect to TB5-5,6)

Default: 10.0 F (5.6 C) Range: 0° to 30 F COOLER DT (0.0 to 16.7 C)

Default: 0 F (–17.8 C) Range: 0° to 30 F COOLER DT (0.0 to 16.7 C)

Default: 0 F (0 C) Range: –30 to 30°F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

CHANGE IN

Reset Amount (°F or °C)

LIMIT SETPOINT

0123 45678 910

ΔT (°F or °C), Entering Fluid Temperature - Leaving Fluid Temperature

RT.F =2

DESIGN RISE

CHANGE IN CHILLED

FLUID, ΔT

RESET AMOUNT RT.NO = 10

RT.DG = 5

Demand Limit — Demand limit is a feature that allows

50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA

75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA

100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA

16 18

DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL – 4 - 20 mA INPUT

100

MAX. ALLOWABLE LOAD (%)

Fig. 23 — 4 to 20-mA Demand Limiting

the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy usage. Three types of demand limiting can be configured. The first type is through 2-stage switch control, which will reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable percentages. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed module and has the ability to limit the current operating capacity to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required.

NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4 to 20-mA input signal types of demand limiting require the energy management module (EMM).

For units with the digital compressor option, digital operation is ignored when determining capacity limit of the machine. Since Demand Limit controls the number of compressors operating, the requested demand limit must allow for the corresponding capacity of the full digital compressor capacity plus any remaining compressors. For example, a 30MP045 unit with a digital compressor will require a demand limit of at least 33% for the first compressor to be energized. No compressor operation will be allowed prior to this demand limit level. Digital operation below 33% will require a demand limit of at least 33% to allow a compressor to start. Digital operation between 33 and 67% will require a demand limit of at least 67% to allow 2 compressors to be operating. Finally, for digital operation above 67%, demand limit must be at 100% to allow for all compressors to be operating.

To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to use. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the type selected.

DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 2-stage switch control, set the Demand Limit Select (Configuration configure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (Configura-

tion



RSETDLS1) and (ConfigurationRSETDLS2)

to the desired capacity limit. See Table 31. Capacity steps are controlled by 2 relay switch inputs field wired to LVT as shown in Fig. 4.

For demand limit by 2-stage switch control, closing the first stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand limit level. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point (DLS1). Closing contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit from exceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch 2 set point. The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest demand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If the demand limit percentage does not match unit staging, the unit will limit capacity to the closest capacity stage.

To disable demand limit, configure DMDC to 0. See Table 31.



RSETDMDC) to 1. Then

EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to 20 mA Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 4 to 20 mA control, set the Demand Limit Select (Configura-

tion



RSETDMDC) to 2. Then configure the Demand

Limit at 20 mA (Configuration



RSETDM20) to the

maximum loadshed value desired. Connect the output from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal to terminal block LVT, terminals 7 and 8 (+,–). Refer to the unit wiring diagram for these connections to the optional/accessory energy management module and terminal block. The control will reduce allowable capacity to this level for the 20 mA signal. See Table 31 and Fig. 23.

CAUTION

DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) — To configure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control set the Demand Limit Select (Configuration



RSETDMDC) to 3.

Then configure the Loadshed Group Number (Configura-

tion



RSETSHNM), Loadshed Demand Delta (Configu-

ration



RSETSHDL), and Maximum Loadshed Time

(ConfigurationRSETSHTM). See Table 31.

The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN system designer. The ComfortLink controls will respond to a Redline command from the Loadshed control. When the Redline command is received, the current stage of capacity is set to the maximum stages available. Should the loadshed control send a Loadshed command, the ComfortLink controls will reduce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed Demand delta. The Maximum Loadshed Time is the maximum length of time that a loadshed condition is allowed to exist. The control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no Cancel command has been received within the configured maximum loadshed time limit.

Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) — A field supplied

and generated, externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal can be used to provide the leaving fluid temperature set point. Connect the signal to LVT-10,8 (+,–). See Table 31 for instructions to enable the function. Figure 24 shows how the 4 to 20 mA signal is linearly calculated on an overall 10 F to 80 F range for fluid types (Configuration point will be limited by the fluid (FLUD) type. Be sure that the chilled water loop is protected at the lowest temperature.



OPT1FLUD) 1 or 2. The set

Table 31 — Configuring Demand Limit

ENTER

Fig. 24 — Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA)

EMM — Energy Management Module

MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

SUB-MODE

CONFIGURATION

*Seven items skipped in this example.

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

DISP TEST ON/OFF Test Display LEDs

UNIT TYPE X Unit Type

OPT1 FLUD X Cooler Fluid

OPT2 CTRL X Control Method

CCN

CCNA X CCN Address

EXV.A

RSET CRST X Cooling Reset Type

DMDC* X Demand Limit Select

DM20 XXX % Demand Limit at 20 mA

SHNM XXX

SHDL XXX%

SHTM XXX MIN

DLS1 XXX %

DLS2 XXX %

Loadshed Group

Number

Loadshed Demand

Delta

Maximum Loadshed

Time

Demand Limit

Switch 1

Demand Limit

Switch 2

Default: 0 0 = None 1 = Switch 2 = 4 to 20 mA Input 3 = CCN Loadshed

Default: 100% Range: 0 to 100

Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99

Default: 0% Range: 0 to 60%

Default: 60 min. Range: 0 to 120 min.

Default: 80% Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 50% Range: 0 to 100%

(32)

(27)

(21)

(15)

(10)

(4.4)

Set Point, F (C)

(–1)

(–7)

(–12)

(–17)

FLUD=2 (Medium Temp Brine) Minimum Set Point 14 F (–10.0 C)

FLUD=1 (Water) Minimum Set Point 38 F (3.3 C)

mA Signal

Maximum Set Point 70 F (21.1 C)

15 20

Digital Scroll Option — The 30MP020-045 units have

a factory-installed option for a digital scroll compressor which provides additional stages of unloading for the unit. The digital compressor is always installed in the A1 compressor location. When a digital compressor is installed, a digital unloader solenoid (DUS) is used on the digital compressor. Digital Scroll Option not available for units controlled by the MultiChiller Controller Accessory panel.

DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION — A digital scroll operates in two stages — the “loaded state” when the solenoid valve is de-energized and the “unloaded state” when the solenoid valve is energized. During the loaded state, the compressor operates like a standard scroll and delivers full capacity and mass flow.

However, during the unloaded state, there is no capacity and no mass flow through the compressor. The capacity of the system is varied by varying the time the compressor operates in an unloaded and loaded state during a 15-second period. If the DUS is energized for 7 seconds, the compressor will be operating at 47% capacity. If the DUS is energized for 10 seconds, the compressor will be operating at approximately 33% of its capacity. Capacity is the time averaged summation of loaded and unloaded states, and its range is continuous from the minimum configured capacity to 100%. Regardless of capacity, the compressor always rotates with constant speed. As the compressor transitions from a loaded to unloaded state, the discharge and suction pressures will fluctuate and the compressor sound will change.

The ComfortLink controller controls and integrates the operation of the DUS into the compressor staging routine to maintain temperature control. When a digital compressor is installed, an additional discharge gas temperature thermistor (DTT) is installed along with the AUX board for control of the DUS.

DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION — When a digital compressor is installed, the configuration parameter (Configuration There is also a maximum unload time configuration, (Config-

uration



020,030) or 7 seconds (sizes 040,045), which indicates the maximum unloading for the digital compressor is 47%. This is done to optimize efficiency of the system.

MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL — Minimum load control is generally not recommended for split systems. If installed, the feature must be enabled in the controls. Minimum load control or hot gas bypass cannot be used in conjunction with the digital scroll option.

Minimum load control can only be added to standard compressor units in the field. This feature will not operate with an optional digital compressor and when the digital function is enabled (Configuration minimum load valve, confirm that the digital compressor option is disabled and set Minimum Load Valve Select to YES, (Configuration

NOTE: Minimum Load Control and Digital Compressor operation cannot be used together.

Table 32 — Configuring Minimum Load Control

ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

A1.TY

MLV.S



UNITA1.TY) is configured to YES.

UNITMAX.T) that is set to 10 seconds (sizes



UnitA1.TY=YES). To enable the



OPT1MLV.S=YES). See Table 32.

CONFIGURATIONUNIT

Range: NO/YES

Compressor A1 Digital?

CONFIGURATIONOPT1

Minimum Load Vlv Select

Default: Depends on product configuration NO = Not Equipped Value must be set to NO

Range: NO/YES Default: NO Set to YES to activate

If equipped and enabled, the Minimum Load Control valve

is active as the last stage of capacity when the unit is unloading. MAINTENANCE REMINDER — The 30MP ComfortLink

controls have the ability to provide a reminder for service personnel that regularly scheduled strainer maintenance is required. Maintenance interval is a field-configurable item. The service interval should be adjusted for the job site conditions. See Table 33.

Table 33 — Configuring Maintenance Reminder

RUN STATUSPMSTRN

ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

Range: 0 to 65,500 hrs

SI.ST Strainer Srvc Interval

Default: 8760 hrs Setting SI.ST to 0 disables the feature

PRE-START-UP

IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up, complete Start-Up Checklist for 30MP Liquid Chiller at end of this publication (pages CL-1 to CL-8). The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record of unit condition, application requirements, system information, and operation at initial start-up.

Do not attempt to start the chiller until following checks

have been completed.

System Check

1. Check all auxiliary components, such as chilled fluid pumps, air-handling equipment, condenser pump or other equipment to which the chiller supplies liquid. Consult manufacturer’s instructions. Verify that any pump interlock contacts have been properly installed. If the unit has field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly installed and wired correctly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams.

2. Use the scrolling marquee display to adjust the Cooling Set Point.

3. Fill chilled fluid circuit with clean water (with recommended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to be cooled. Bleed all air out of the high points of the system. If chilled water is to be maintained at a temperature below 40 F (4.4 C), a brine of sufficient concentration must be used to prevent freeze-up at anticipated suction temperatures. To ensure sufficient loop volume, see Tables 34 and 35.

4. Check tightness of all electrical connections.

5. Oil should be visible in the compressor sight glass(es). See Fig. 25. An acceptable oil level in the compressors is

from

/8 to 3/8 of sight glass when the compressors are off. Adjust the oil level as required. See Oil Charge section on page 45 for Carrier approved oils.

6. Crankcase heaters must be firmly attached to compressors, and must be on for 24 hours prior to start-up (30MPA015-045, 30MPA,MPW050-071 only).

7. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.

8. Check rotation of scroll compressors. Monitor control alarms during first compressor start-up for reverse rotation protection alarm.

Table 34 — Minimum Flow Rates and Minimum Loop Volume — English

OIL SIGHTGLASS

Fig. 25 — Sight Glass Location

FLOW RATE

UNIT SIZE

30MP015 22 22 12 2 N/A 12 3.4 N/A 30MP020 28 28 6 4 3 10 10 6 30MP030 43 43 6 4 3 10 10 6 30MP040 55 55 3 3 3 6 6 6 30MP045

30MP050 30MP055

30MP060 30MP065 30MP071

EVAPORATOR CONDENSER

Gal./Min Gal./Min Std Unit HGBP Digital Std Unit HGBP Digital

64 70 77 84 91

104

64 3 3 3 6 6 6 70 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A 77 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A 84 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A 91 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A

104 6 4 N/A 10 6 N/A

NORMAL AIR CONDITIONING APPLICATION

Gal./Ton

PROCESS COOLING OR LOW AMBIENT

OPERATION APPLICATION

Gal./Ton

HGBP — Hot Gas Bypass

LEGEND

Table 35 — Minimum Flow Rates and Minimum Loop Volume — SI

FLOW RATE

UNIT SIZE

30MP015 1.4 1.4 13.0 8.6 N/A 13.0 13.0 N/A 30MP020 1.8 1.8 6.5 4.3 3.3 10.8 10.8 6.5 30MP030 2.7 2.7 6.5 4.3 3.3 10.8 10.8 6.5 30MP040 3.5 3.5 3.3 3.3 3.3 6.5 6.5 6.5 30MP045

30MP050 30MP055 30MP060 30MP065 30MP071

HGBP — Hot Gas Bypass

EVAPORATOR CONDENSER

L/s L/s Std Unit HGBP Digital Std Unit HGBP Digital

4.0

4.5

4.9

5.3

5.8

6.6

LEGEND

4.0 3.3 3.3 3.3 6.5 6.5 6.5

4.5 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A

4.9 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A

5.3 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A

5.8 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A

6.6 6.5 4.3 N/A 10.8 6.5 N/A

NORMAL AIR CONDITIONING APPLICATION

L per kW

PROCESS COOLING OR LOW AMBIENT

OPERATION APPLICATION

L per kW

CAUTION

Crankcase heaters are wired into the control circuit, so they are always operable as long as the main power supply disconnect is on (closed), even if any safety device is open. Compressor heaters must be on for 24 hours prior to the start-up of any compressor. Equipment damage could result if heaters are not energized for at least 24 hours prior to compressor start-up.

Compressor crankcase heaters must be on for 24 hours before start-up. To energize the crankcase heaters, close the field disconnect. Leave the compressor circuit breakers off/open. The crankcase heaters are now energized.

NOTE: Refer to Start-Up Checklist on pages CL-1 to CL-8. PRELIMINARY CHARGE (30MPA) — Refer to GTAC II

(General Training Air Conditioning), Module 5, Charging, Recovery, Recycling and Reclamation for charging procedures.

The 30MPA units (condenserless) are shipped with a nitrogen holding charge only. Leak check the 30MPA unit, discharge and liquid lines, and the condenser. Be sure the liquid

START-UP AND OPERATION

IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up, review Start-Up Checklist at the back of this publication. The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit and provides a record of unit condition, application requirements, system information, and operation at initial start-up.

line service valve is open. After leak check is completed, system must be evacuated and dehydrated. Following the evacuation, the system must be fully charged.

The liquid charging method is recommended for complete charging or when additional charge is required.

Using the liquid charging method and charging by weight procedure, charge the circuit with the amount of Puron refrigerant (R-410A) with the sum of the operating charge listed in Table 36 for the base unit, the liquid line charge and the operating charge of the condenser as the preliminary charge.

Table 36 — Preliminary Puron Refrigerant (R-410A)

Charge, lb (kg)

UNIT SIZE

30MPA015 8.2 (3.7) 30MPA020 10.7 (4.9) 30MPA030 12.5 (5.7) 30MPA040 14.7 (6.7) 30MPA045 15.1 (6.8) 30MPA050 29.7 (13.5) 30MPA055 30.7 (14.0) 30MPA060 33.1 (15.0) 30MPA065 34.0 (15.5) 30MPA071 39.0 (17.7)

OPERATING CHARGE AMOUNT

LB (kg)

NOTE: For liquid line piping, use the following information:

½ in. (12.7 mm) liquid line - 0.6 lb per 10 linear feet

(0.27 kg per 3 m)

/8 in. (15.9 mm) liquid line - 1.0 lb per 10 linear feet

(0.45 kg per 3 m)

/8 in. (22.2 mm) liquid line - 2.0 lb per 10 linear feet

(0.91 kg per 3 m)

/8 in. (28.6 mm) liquid line - 3.5 lb per 10 linear feet

(1.59 kg per 3 m)

/8 in. (34.9 mm) liquid line - 5.1 lb per 10 linear feet

(2.32 kg per 3 m)

CAUTION

Never charge liquid into the low pressure side of the system. Do not overcharge. Overcharging results in higher discharge pressure, possible compressor damage, and higher power consumption. During charging or removal of refrigerant, be sure cooler water is continuously circulating through the cooler to prevent freezing.

While the unit is running at full capacity, add refrigerant un-

til the sight glass is clear. The required refrigerant is R-410A.

With the unit operating at full load, check liquid line sight glass to be sure the unit is fully charged (bubbles in the sight glass indicate the unit is not fully charged).

IMPORTANT: For proper charging, units equipped with a digital compressor must have the digital compressor operation disabled to maintain stable operation. To disable digi-



UNIT

tal compressor operation, set Configuration



A1.TY (Compressor A1 Digital?) to NO. Be sure to re- enable the digital operation after charging operation is complete.

Follow approved evacuation procedures when removing refrigeration. Release remaining pressure to an approved evacuated cylinder.

Actual Start-Up — Actual start-up should be done only

under supervision of a qualified refrigeration mechanic.

1. Be sure all service valves are open (30MPA units only).

2. Using the scrolling marquee display, set leaving-fluid set point (Set Points adjustment is necessary.

3. Start chilled fluid pump (if not configured for cooler pump control).

4. Start condenser fluid pump (if not configured for condenser pump control (30MPW only).

5. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTROL switch to ENABLE position.

6. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is functioning properly. Check to see that leaving fluid tempera-



COOLCSP.1). No cooling range

ture agrees with leaving set point (Set Points



CSP.1) or (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2), or if reset is



COOL

used, with the control point (Run StatusVIEW



CTPT).

7. Check the cooler leaving chilled water temperature to see that it remains well above 32 F (0° C), or the brine freezing point if the unit is a medium temperature brine unit.

8. Recheck compressor oil level (see Oil Charge section).

Check Refrigerant Charge — All 30MPW units are

shipped with a complete operating charge of R-410A and should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test after installation. If there is no system pressure, admit nitrogen until a pressure is observed and then proceed to test for leaks. After leaks are repaired, the system must be dehydrated.

All refrigerant charging should be done through the ¼-in. Schrader connection on the liquid line. Do NOT add refrigerant charge through the low-pressure side of the system. If complete charging is required, weigh in the appropriate charge for the circuit as shown on the unit nameplate. If partial charging is required, operate circuit at full load and add charge to reach 9 to 12 F (–12.8 to –11.1 C) subcooling entering the expansion valve. See Step 6b on page 39.

The liquid charging method is recommended for complete charging or when additional charge is required.

NOTE: On units with digital scroll option do not check refrigerant; charge if compressor is operating at less than 100% capacity; digital operation can be disabled by configuring A1.TY = NO (Configuration



UnitA1.TY).

CAUTION

Never charge liquid into low-pressure side of system. Do not overcharge. Overcharging results in higher discharge pressure, possible compressor damage, and higher power consumption. During charging or removal of refrigerant, be sure water is continuously circulating through the cooler and condenser (30MPW) to prevent freezing.

CAUTION

Be careful not to overcharge the system. Overcharging results in higher discharge pressure, possible compressor damage, and higher power consumption.

EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION — The 30MP015045 systems use polyol ester (POE) oil, and 30MP050-071 systems use polyvinyl ester (PVE) oil. Because either type of oil can absorb moisture, it is important to minimize the amount of time that the system interior is left exposed to the atmosphere. Minimizing the exposure time of the oil to the atmosphere will minimize the amount of moisture that needs to be removed during evacuation.

Once all of the piping connections are complete, leak test the unit and then pull a deep dehydration vacuum. Connect the vacuum pump to the high flow Schrader valve in the suction line and liquid line. For best results, it is recommended that a vacuum of at least 500 microns (0.5 mm Hg) be obtained. Afterwards, to ensure that no moisture is present in the system, perform a standing vacuum-rise test.

With the unit in deep vacuum (500 microns or less), isolate the vacuum pump from the system. Observe the rate-of-rise of the vacuum in the system. If the vacuum rises by more than 50 microns in a 30-minute time period, then continue the dehydration process. Maintain a vacuum on the system until the standing vacuum requirement is met. This will ensure a dry system.

By following these evacuation and dehydration procedures, the amount of moisture present in the system will be minimized. It is required that liquid line filter driers be installed between the condenser(s) and the expansion devices to capture any foreign debris and provide additional moisture removal capacity.

LIQUID CHARGING METHOD For 30MP015-045: Add charge to the unit through the liquid

line service valve. Never charge liquid into the low-pressure side of the system.

For 30MP050-071: Add the charge to the unit through the high flow Schrader valve on the filter drier.

1. Close liquid line ball valve (30MPA only).

2. Connect a refrigerant cylinder loosely to the high flow Schrader valve connection on the liquid line. Purge the charging hose and tighten the connections.

3. Open the refrigerant cylinder valve.

4. If the system has been dehydrated and is under vacuum, break the vacuum with refrigerant gas. For R-410A, build up system pressure to 101 psig and 32 F (697 kPa and 0° C). Invert the refrigerant cylinder so that the liquid refrigerant will be charged.

5. a. For complete charge of 30MPW units, follow

charging by weight procedure. When charge is nearly full, complete the process by observing the sight glass for clear liquid flow while the unit is operating. The use of sight glass charging is valid only when unit is operating at full capacity.

b. For complete charge of 30MPA units or where

refrigerant cylinder cannot be weighed, follow the condenser manufacturer’s charging procedure or follow charging by sight glass procedure. The use

of sight glass charging is valid only when unit is operating at full capacity.

6. a. The 30MPA condenserless units are shipped

with a nitrogen holding charge. After installation with the field-supplied system high side, the complete system should be evacuated and charged per the condenser manufacturer’s charging procedure or charged until the sight glass is clear (with the unit running at full capacity). To achieve maxi-

mum system capacity, add additional charge equal to the difference between the condenser optimal charge and the condenser minimum charge, which can be obtained from the charge data provided in the condenser installation instructions.

b. To ensure maximum performance of 30MPW

units, raise the compressor saturated discharge temperature (SDT) to approximately 100 F (37.8 C) by throttling the condenser water intake. Add charge until there is approximately 9 to 12° F (5.0 to 6.6° C) of system subcooling (SDT minus actual temperature entering the expansion valve).

Check Compressor Oil Level — After adjusting the

refrigerant charge, allow each circuit to run fully loaded for 20 minutes. Stop the compressors and check the oil level. Oil level should be

/8 to 3/8 up on the sight glass.

IMPORTANT: Oil level should only be checked when the compressors are off.

Add oil only if necessary to bring the oil into view in the sight glass. If oil is added, run the circuit for an additional 10 minutes, then stop and check oil level. If the level remains low, check the piping system for proper design for oil return; also, check the system for leaks. If checking the oil level with unit running in part load, let unit run one hour, then run at full load for 10 minutes. If oil does not return to acceptable sight glass levels, check for correct suction piping and line sizing.

Adjust Oil Charge — Although the compressors are

factory charged with oil, additional oil is likely required to maintain the oil level in the compressor. Tables 37 and 38 indicate the likely amount required based on the liquid line size and system piping length. Additional lubricant estimate is based on using recommended pipe sizes. Values listed are estimates only. See Add Oil section for Carrier-approved oils. After operating the compressor for a period of time, the oil level should be between compressor oil level should be checked with the compressor off to avoid the sump turbulence when the compressor is running. Oil must be added if the oil level does not meet the requirements.

/8 and 3/8 of the oil sight glass. The

Table 37 — 60 Hz Additional Lubricant (English)

UNIT SIZE

30MPA015 S018 0 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 30MPA020 S020 11 12 13 14 21 23 26 28 30MPA030 S030 13 15 17 20 22 24 27 29 30MPA040 M040 27 30 33 36 51 57 63 68 30MPA045 M050

30MPA050 M050 30MPA055 M055 30MPA060 M060 30MPA065 M065 30MPA071 M075

CONDENSER

09DP

Up to 25 ft 25 to 50 ft 50 to 75 ft 75 to 100 ft 100 to 125 ft 125 to 150 ft 150 to 175 ft 175 to 200 ft

27 27 27 28 33 39

ADDITIONAL LUBRICANT (FLUID OUNCES) REQUIRED FOR PIPING AND REFRIGERANT

30 33 37 52 57 63 69 30 34 38 53 59 65 71 31 35 39 53 59 65 71 32 36 40 54 60 66 72 37 41 45 59 65 71 77 43 47 51 65 71 77 83

Table 38 — 60 Hz Additional Lubricant (SI)

UNIT SIZE

30MPA015 S018 0 262 319 352 384 417 450 482 30MPA020 S020 315 347 380 413 620 688 756 823 30MPA030 S030 372 440 508 575 643 710 778 846 30MPA040 M040 784 881 977 1074 1511 1676 1841 2005 30MPA045 M050 30MPA050 M050

30MPA055 M055 30MPA060 M060 30MPA065 M065 30MPA071 M075

CONDENSER

09DP

Up to 7.5 m 7.5 to 15 m 15 to 22.5 m 22.5 to 30 m 30 to 37.5 m 37.5 to 45 m 45 to 52.5 m 52.5 to 60 m

791 783 795 825 976

1147

ADDITIONAL LUBRICANT (ML) REQUIRED FOR PIPING AND REFRIGERANT

888 984 1081 1518 1683 1848 2012 898 1014 1129 1546 1722 1897 2073 911 1026 1141 1558 1734 1910 2085

941 1056 1171 1588 1764 1939 2115 1091 1206 1322 1739 1914 2090 2266 1263 1378 1493 1910 2086 2261 2437

Operating Limitations

TEMPERATURES — See Table 39 for 30MP standard temperature limits. The 30MPW050-071 and 30MPA050071 units use different compressors that require different operating envelopes. The 30MPW050-071 units (standard condensing) use water-cooled optimized compressors, which operate at lower condensing temperatures. The 30MPA050-071 units and 30MPW050-071 heat reclaim units use air-cooled optimized compressors, which allow for higher condensing temperatures.

CAUTION

Do not operate with cooler leaving chiller water (fluid) temperature (LCWT) below 32 F (0° C) for standard units with proper brine solution, 40 F (4.4 C) for the standard units with fresh water, or below 15 F (–9.4 C) for units factory built for medium temperature brine, or unit damage may occur.

High Cooler Leaving Chilled Water (Fluid) Temperatures (LCWT) — During start-up with cooler the LCWT should not be above approximately 60 F (16 C).

Low Cooler LCWT the LCWT must be no lower than 40 F (4.4 C). For standard units with a proper brine solution, the LCWT must be no lower than 32 F (0° C). If the unit is the factory-installed optional medium temperature brine unit, the cooler LCWT can go down to 15 F (–9.4 C).

Table 39 — Temperature Limits for

TEMPERATURE LIMIT

Maximum Condenser LWT Minimum Condenser EWT Maximum Cooler EWT* Maximum Cooler LWT Minimum Cooler LWT†

EWT — LWT —

*For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85 F (29.4 C). †Unit requires modification below this temperature.

Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature

IMPORTANT: Medium temperature brine duty application (below 32 F [0° C] LCWT) for chiller normally requires factory modification. Contact your Carrier representative for applicable LCWT range for standard water-cooled chiller in a specific application.

VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS Main Power Supply

supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions.

Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a motor where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%.

To determine percent voltage imbalance:

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average across all 3 legs.

— For standard units with fresh water,

Standard 30MP Units

30MPA,

LEGEND

30MPW015-045,

30MPW050-071

HIGH

CONDENSING

FCFC

140 60 120 49 65 18 65 18

75 23 75 23 60 15 60 15

40 4 40 4

STANDARD

30MPW050-071

— Minimum and maximum acceptable

max voltage deviation

from avg voltage

average voltage

Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.

AB = 243 v

BC = 236 v AC = 238 v

1. Determine average voltage:

Average voltage =

243 + 236 + 238

717

= 239

2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage: (AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v

(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v (AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v

Maximum deviation is 4 v.

3. Determine percent voltage imbalance:

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

239

= 1.7%

This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the

maximum allowable of 2%.

IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is more than 2%, contact your local electric utility company immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition is corrected.

Control Circuit Power

— Power for the control circuit is supplied from the main incoming power through a factoryinstalled control power transformer (TRAN1) for all models. Field wiring connections are made to the LVT.

OPERATION SEQUENCE

The unit is started by putting the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTROL switch in the ENABLE or REMOTE CONTROL position. When the unit receives a call for cooling (either from the internal control or CCN network command or remote control closure), the unit stages up in capacity to maintain the leaving fluid set point. The first compressor starts 1

/2 to 3 minutes

after the call for cooling.

For all units, if temperature reset is being used, the unit controls to a higher leaving-fluid temperature as the building load reduces. If demand limit is used, the unit may temporarily be unable to maintain the desired leaving-fluid temperature because of imposed power limitations.

SERVICE

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during service. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed.

Service Test —

power must be on.

The Service Test function should be used to verify proper operation of condenser output, compressors, minimum load

Both main power and control circuit

valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump, EXV, and remote

ENTER

ESCAPE

Fig. 26 — Cutaway View of the Electronic

Expansion Valve (Sizes 050-071)

alarm relay. To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch must be in the OFF position. Use the display keys to enter the mode and display TEST. Press twice so that OFF flashes. Enter the password if required. Use either arrow key to change the TEST value to the ON position and press . Move the Enable/Off/Remote Control switch to enable. Press and the button to enter the OUTS or COMP sub-mode. ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE



must be set to ENABLE to operate test.

switch

NOTE: Cooler and condenser (30MPW) water flow must be established in order to operate compressor in service test.

Test the condenser output, cooler pump, liquid line solenoid valve (30MPA only), crankcase heater, water valve (accessory), and alarm relay by changing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for 10 minutes. When testing compressors, the lead compressor must be started first. All compressor outputs can be turned on, but the control will limit the rate by staging one compressor per minute. Minimum load valve can be tested with the compressors on or off. The relays under the COMP mode will stay on for 10 minutes if there is no keypad activity. Compressors will stay on until they are turned off by the operator. The Service Test mode will remain enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors running. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a compressor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any other mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during the TEST mode. The STAT item (Run Status



VIEW) will display “0” as long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chiller can be switched to Enable or Remote control for normal operation.

Charging — For 30MPW units, when service is required,

recover the refrigerant from the system.

For 30MPA units when service is required, the compressor and evaporator can be serviced by closing the factory-installed liquid line service valve and field-installed discharge line service valve. After the valves are closed, recover the refrigerant from the system.

Electronic Components

CONTROL COMPONENTS — Unit uses an advanced electronic control system that normally does not require service. For details on controls refer to Controls section.

Access to the controls is through a hinged panel. Inner panels are secured in place and should not be removed unless all power to the chiller is off.

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) (30MP050071 Only) —

High-pressure liquid refrigerant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes through the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-phase condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion valve operates through an electronically controlled activation of a stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position, unless power pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator windings for rotation in either direction. The direction depends on the phase relationship of the power pulses.

As the stepper motor rotates, its motion is transferred to linear movement by a lead screw. Refrigerant flow is modulated by either opening or closing the port. The valve includes a positive shut-off when closed.

See Fig. 26 for a cutaway view of the EXV.

1. Cable

2. Glass Seal

3. Motor Housing

4. Stepper Motor

5. Bearing

6. Lead Screw

7. Insert

8. Valve Piston

9. Valve Seat

10. Valve Port

Table 40 shows the number of steps for the EXV. The EXV motor moves at 150 steps per second. Commanding the valve to either 0% or 100% will add extra steps to the move, to ensure the value is open or closed completely.

Table 40 — EXV Steps

UNIT SIZE 30MP EXV STEPS

050-071 3690

The EXV board controls the valve. Each circuit has a thermistor located in a well in the suction manifold before the compressor. Suction pressure as measured by the suction pressure transducer is converted to a saturated suction temperature. The thermistor measures the temperature of the superheated gas entering the compressor and the pressure transducer determines the saturated temperature of suction gas. The difference between the temperature of the superheated gas and the saturated suction temperature is the superheat. The EXV board controls the position of the electronic expansion valve stepper motor to maintain superheat set point.

The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approximately 9° F (5° C). Because EXV status is communicated to the main base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV boards, it is possible to track the valve position. The unit is then protected against loss of charge and a faulty valve. Just prior to compressor start, the EXV will open. At low ambient temperatures the EXV is closed at start up. After initialization period, valve position is tracked by the EXV board by constantly monitoring the amount of valve movement.

The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction temperature to 50 F (10 C). This makes it possible for the chiller to start at higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the compressor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maximum operating pressure).

If it appears that the EXV module is not properly controlling circuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there are a number of checks that can be made using test functions and initialization features built into the microprocessor control. See the EXV Troubleshooting Procedure section to test EXVs.

EXV Troubleshooting Procedure — Follow steps

ESCAPE

ENTER

Fig. 27 — 30MP050-071 EXV Cable Connections

to EXV Module

ENTER

below to diagnose and correct EXV problems.

Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/ Remote Control (EOR) switch to the Off position. Press on the scrolling marquee until the display is blank or on Navigator™ display until ‘Select a menu item’ appears on the display. Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test mode. Press

. The display will be:

> TEST OFF OUTS COMP

Press (password entry may be required) and use

to change OFF to ON. Switch the EOR switch to Enable. The Service Test mode is now enabled. Move the pointer down to the OUTS sub-mode and press . Move the pointer to item EXV.A. Press and the valve position will flash. Use

to select 100% valve position (hold for quick movement) and press .

The technician should be able to feel the actuator moving by placing a hand on the EXV. A sight glass is located on the valve body to verify that the actuator is moving. A hard knocking should be felt from the actuator when it reaches the top of its stroke (can be heard if surroundings are relatively quiet). Press

again twice if necessary to confirm this. To close the valve, press , select 0% with and press . The actuator should knock when it reaches the bottom of its stroke. If it is believed that the valve is not working properly, continue with the checkout procedure below.

Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on the EXV Board (see Fig. 27). Do not disconnect EXV connector with power applied to the board. Damage to the board may result if disconnected while under power. Connect positive test lead to EXV-J6 terminal 3. Set meter to approximately 20 vdc. Using the Service Test procedure above, move the valve output under test to 100%. DO NOT short meter leads together or connect pin 3 to any other pin as board damage will occur.

6 vdc. If it remains constant at a voltage other than 6 vdc or shows 0 volts, remove the connector to the valve and recheck.

Press and select 0% to close the valve. Check the 4position DIP switch on the board (all switches should be set to On). If a problem still exists, replace the EXV board. If the reading is correct, the expansion valve and EXV wiring should be checked.

1. Check color coding and wire connections. Make sure they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV board and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.

2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin terminals.

3. If the motor fails to operate properly, check the resistance of each motor phase. Remove the EXV Board J6 connector. Check the resistance of the two windings. Resistance between pins 1 and 2 for one winding or between pins 4 and 5 for the other winding should be approximately 52 ±

5.2 ohms. Differences of more than 10% between windings indicate a defective motor. Resistance between any lead and ground should be infinite or “open.” Any resistance reading will indicate a shorted winding and the valve will need to be replaced.

FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS — See Fig. 26 for a cutaway view of the EXV. Motor kits for the EXV valve are available as replacement parts.

EXV VALVE REPLACEMENT — To replace the valve, perform the following procedure:

1. Be sure the refrigerant has been recovered from the circuit.

2. Disconnect the EXV cable from the EXV.

3. The valve may be replaced by cutting the piping. A tubing cutter must be used to prevent creating contaminants in the piping.

4. The EXVs have copper connections and any brazing alloy can be used to install the valve. During installation the torch flame should be directed away from the valve body and cable. The valve body should be wrapped with a wet cloth during the brazing operation. Be sure to use a nitrogen purge while brazing the valve in place.

5. Check for refrigerant leaks.

6. Once the valve body has cooled, reconnect the EXV cable. Care should be taken to ensure engagement of the alignment key.

7. Check the operation of the valve using the EXV Troubleshooting Procedure on this page.

VALVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT

CAUTION

Do not disconnect EXV connector with power applied to the board. Damage to the board may result if disconnected while under power. DO NOT short meter leads together or connect pin 3 to any other pin as board damage will occur.

During the next several seconds, carefully connect the negative test lead to pins 1,2,4 and 5 in succession (plug J6). Digital voltmeters will average this signal and display approximately

IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gasket before opening EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.

Perform the following procedure to replace the EXV

motor:

1. Be sure the refrigerant has been recovered from the circuit.

2. Use Service Test to open the EXV to 100%. This will retract the piston fully.

3. Remove power from the EXV board and then disconnect the EXV Cable from the EXV.

4. Using a wrench and back-up wrench, remove the motor assembly from the EXV body. Be sure to place the backup wrench on the adapter to remove the motor as shown in Fig. 28.

5. To install the motor, be sure to use a new gasket.

6. Manually depress the valve piston before installing the

CLOSED

OPEN

CLOSED

OPEN

27mm / 11/16''

ADAPTER

GASKET

EF05BD331 NV 36mm

50Nm (36 ft-lb)+ 30°

27mm / 1

/16''

a30-5977

DISASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY

NOTES:

1. Push down on valve piston to close valve before assembling.

2. After valve is assembled close valve in Quick Test sub-mode or cycle power before opening service valve.

Fig. 28 — Disassembly and Assembly of EXV Motor

(30MP050-071)

NOTE: Open valve in Quick Test sub-mode before disassembling.

motor assembly. This will allow for the lead screw to engage the piston as the motor is installed.

7. Lightly oil the threads and gasket on the new motor. Carefully seat the motor on the valve body. Using a wrench and back-up wrench as described above, tighten the motor assembly as follows: Tighten the motor to

36 ft-lb (50 N-m) and then tighten an additional 30 degrees as indicated in Fig. 28.

8. After the motor is tightened, the cable should be replaced on the valve. Care should be taken to ensure engagement of the alignment key. Pressurize the system and check for leaks.

9. Reapply control power and test the operation using Service Test operation listed above.

Compressor Replacement — All models contain

LEGEND

CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer EWT — Entering Water Thermistor HPS — High Pressure Switch LWT — Leaving Water Thermistor RGT — Return Gas Thermistor (Optional) SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

a30-5049

Fig. 29 — Compressor Location — 30MP015-045 Units (30MPW045 Unit Shown)

scroll compressors and have two or three compressors. A compressor is most easily removed from the side of the unit or above, depending on where clearance space was allowed during unit installation. See Fig. 29.

Remove the junction box cover bolts and disconnect the compressor power and crankcase heater connections. Remove the cable from the compressor junction box. Remove the connections from the high-pressure switch. Remove the crankcase heater. Knock the same holes out of the new compressor junction box and install the cable connectors from the old compressor.

The compressors are bolted to rails, which are in turn bolted to the unit basepan for all sizes. Remove the 4 bolts holding the compressor to the rail on the basepan. Save the mounting hardware for use with the new compressor. Carefully cut the compressor suction and discharge lines with a tubing cutter as close to the compressor as feasible. Remove high-pressure switch and pressure transducer(s) if required for compressor removal. Lift one corner of the compressor at a time and remove all the steel spacers. Remove the old compressor from the unit.

Slide the new compressor in place on the rails. Lifting one side of the compressor at a time, replace all of the compressor mounting hardware. Using new tubing as required, reconnect compressor suction and discharge lines. Using hardware saved, reinstall the mounting bolts and washers through the compressor feet. Using proper techniques, braze suction and discharge lines and check for leaks. Reconnect oil equalization line.

Re-install the crankcase heater. Reconnect the compressor power connections and high-pressure switch wiring as on the old compressor. Refer to Fig. 29. Following the installation of the new compressor, tighten all hardware to the following specifications. (See Tables 41 and 42.)

Table 41 — Unit Torque Specification,

30MP015-045

FASTENER RECOMMENDED TORQUE

Compressor Mounting Bolts

Compressor Power Connections

Compressor Ground Terminal Connections

7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)

2 to 2.33 ft-lb (2.7 to 3.16 N-m)

1.2 to 1.5 ft-lb (1.6 to 2.0 N-m)

Table 42 — Unit Torque Specification,

30MP050-071

FASTENER RECOMMENDED TORQUE

Compressor Mounting Bolts

Compressor Power Connections

Compressor Ground Terminal Connections

7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)

3.33 to 3.75 ft-lb (4.5 to 5.1 N-m)

30MP Cooler and 30MPW Condenser

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER AND CONDENSER HEAT EXCHANGER REPLACEMENT — Brazed-plate heat exchangers cannot be repaired if they develop a leak. If a leak (refrigerant or water) develops, the heat exchanger must be replaced. To replace a brazed plate heat exchanger:

1. Disconnect the liquid-in and liquid-out connections at the heat exchanger.

2. Check that the replacement heat exchanger is the same as the original heat exchanger. For the condensers, compare part numbers on the heat exchangers. For the coolers, insulation covers the manufacturer’s part number. Make sure the depths of the replacement and original cooler heat exchangers are the same.

3. Recover the refrigerant from the system, and unsolder the refrigerant-in and refrigerant-out connections.

HPS

DPT

RGT

SPT

EWT (HIDDEN)

CWFS

LWT

4. Remove the four nuts holding the heat exchanger to the brackets. Save the nuts.

5. Install the replacement heat exchanger in the unit and attach to the bracket using the four nuts removed in Step 4. For sizes 015 and 020, torque is 7 to 10 ft-lb. For sizes 030-045, torque is 35 to 50 ft-lb. For sizes 050-071, torque is 10 to 11 ft-lb.

6. Carefully braze the refrigerant lines to the connections on the heat exchanger. Lines should be soldered using silver as the soldering material with a minimum of 45% silver. Keep the temperature below 1472 F (800 C) under normal soldering conditions (no vacuum) to prevent the copper solder of the brazed plate heat exchanger from changing its structure. Failure to do so can result in internal or external leakage at the connections which cannot be repaired.

7. For coolers, ensure that the original size tubing is used

(

/2 in. for sizes 015 and 020, 5/8 in. for sizes 030-045, and

/8 in. for sizes 050-071) between the TXV/EXV or expansion device and the cooler. The TXV/EXV or expansion device must be located within 1 ft of the heat exchanger, with no bends between the TXV/EXV or expansion device outlet and the cooler inlet.

8. Reconnect the water/brine lines.

9. Dehydrate and recharge the unit. Check for leaks.

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER AND CONDENSER HEAT EXCHANGER CLEANING — Brazed-plate heat exchangers must be cleaned chemically. A professional cleaning service skilled in chemical cleaning should be used. Use a weak acid (5% phosphoric acid, or if the heat exchanger is cleaned frequently, 5% oxalic acid). Pump the cleaning solution through the exchanger, preferably in a backflush mode. After cleaning, rinse with large amounts of fresh water to dispose of all the acid. Cleaning materials must be disposed of properly.

The strainers in front of the water/brine inlets of the heat exchangers should be cleaned periodically, depending on condition of the chiller water/brine.

Water Treatment — Untreated or improperly treated

water may result in corrosion, scaling, erosion, or algae. The services of a qualified water treatment specialist should be obtained to develop and monitor a treatment program. See water system cleaning section for water quality characteristics and limitations in the unit installation instructions.

CAUTION

Water must be within design flow limits, clean and treated to ensure proper machine performance and reduce the potential of tubing damage due to corrosion, scaling, erosion, and algae. Carrier assumes no responsibility for chiller or condenser damage resulting from untreated or improperly treated water.

Oil Charge

CAUTION

The compressor in a Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) system uses a polyol ester (POE) oil or poly vinyl ester (PVE) oil. This is extremely hygroscopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. Take all necessary precautions to avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere. Failure to do so could result in possible equipment damage.

Puron refrigerant systems use a polyol ester (POE) oil for 30MP015-045 units. The 30MP050-071 units use polyvinyl ester (PVE) oil. See Table 43.

Table 43 — Compressor Oils

30MP UNIT SIZE OIL

015-045 POE 3MAF 050-071 PVE FVC32D

Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Oil should be

visible in compressor oil sight glass. An acceptable oil level is

/8 to 3/8 of sight glass. All compressors must be off when

from checking oil level. Recommended oil level adjustment method is as follows:

ADD OIL — Additional oil may be required in 30MPA units. Tables 37 and 38 provide an estimate of the amount of oil required, based on the line length and the recommended pipe sizes. The actual circuit oil charge will depend on the application piping. The guidelines listed are estimates and will likely need adjusting depending on the number of traps in the application and the pipe sizes utilized.

No attempt should be made to increase the oil level in the

sight-glass above the

/4 full level. A high oil level is not sustainable in the compressor and the extra oil will be pumped out into the system causing a reduction in system efficiency and a higher-than-normal oil circulation rate.

Add oil to suction line Schrader valve on tandem compressors sets and the compressor Schrader on the trios. When oil can be seen at the bottom of the sight glass, add oil in 5 oz increments which is approximately

/8 in oil level. Run all compressors for 20 minutes then shut off to check oil level. Repeat procedure until acceptable oil level is present.

NOTE: Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Approved sources for 30MP015-045 units are:

Totaline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3MAF POE, P903-1601

Mobil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EAL Arctic 32-3MA

Uniqema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RL32-3MAF

The approved source for 30MP050-071 units is:

Totaline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FVC32D, P903-2501

Do not reuse oil that has been drained out, or oil that has

been exposed to atmosphere.

Check Refrigerant Feed Components

FILTER DRIER — The function of the filter drier is to maintain a clean, dry system. The moisture indicator (described below) indicates any need to change the filter drier. The filter drier is a sealed-type drier for 30MP015-045 and removeable core for 30MP050-071. When the drier needs to be changed, the entire filter drier must be replaced for 30MP015-045 units.

MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR — The indicator is located immediately ahead of the TXV to provide an indication of the refrigerant moisture content. It also provides a sight glass for refrigerant liquid. Clear flow of liquid refrigerant (at full unit loading) indicates sufficient charge in the system. Bubbles in the sight glass (at full unit loading) indicate an undercharged system or the presence of noncondensables. Moisture in the system, measured in parts per million (ppm), changes the color of the indicator as follows:

Green (safe) —Moisture is below 75 ppm Yellow-Green (caution) — 75 to 150 ppm Yellow (wet) — above 150 ppm

The unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before the moisture indicator gives an accurate reading, and must be in contact with liquid refrigerant. At the first sign of moisture in the system, change the corresponding filter drier.

THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (TXV) (30MP015-045 ONLY) — The TXV controls the flow of liquid refrigerant to the cooler by maintaining constant superheat of vapor leaving the cooler. The valve is activated by a temperature-sensing bulb strapped to the suction line.

The valve(s) is factory-set to maintain between 8° and 10° F (4.4° and 5.6° C) of superheat leaving the cooler. Check the superheat during operation after conditions have stabilized. If necessary, adjust the superheat to prevent refrigerant floodback to the compressor.

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE — On units equipped with the factory-installed hot gas bypass option, a solenoid valve and discharge bypass valve (minimum load valve) are located between the discharge line and the cooler entering-refrigerant line. The MBB cycles the solenoid to perform minimum load valve function and the discharge bypass valve modulates to the suction pressure set point of the valve. The bypass valve has an adjustable opening setting between 95 to 115 psig (655 to 793 kPa). The factory setting is 105 psig (724 kPa).

The amount of capacity reduction achieved by the minimum load valve is not adjustable. The total unit capacity with the minimum load valve is shown in Table 14.

PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES — All units have one pressure relief device per circuit located in the liquid line which relieves at 210 F (100 C).

The 30MPW unit does not have a condenser pressure relief valve because the brazed-plate condenser is not considered a pressure vessel, as defined in ANSI/ASHRAE 15 (American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers) safety code requirements.

For 30MPA condenserless units, pressure relief devices designed to relieve at the pressure determined in local codes, must be field-supplied and installed in the discharge line piping in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 safety code requirements. Additional pressure relief valves, properly selected, must be field-supplied and installed to protect high side equipment and may be required by applicable codes.

Most codes require that a relief valve be vented directly to the outdoors. The vent line must not be smaller than the relief valve outlet. Consult ANSI/ASHRAE 15 for detailed information concerning layout and sizing of relief vent lines.

Check Unit Safeties

HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH — A high-pressure switch is provided to protect the circuit and refrigeration system from unsafe high pressure conditions. For 30MP050-071, two different high pressure switches are used, depending on unit configuration. See Table 44 for high-pressure switch settings.

The high-pressure switch is mounted in the discharge line of the circuit. If an unsafe, high-pressure condition should exist, the switch opens and shuts off the unit. The MBB senses the HPS feedback signal and generates an appropriate alarm. The MBB prevents the circuit from restarting until the alert condition is reset. The switch should open at the pressure corresponding to the appropriate switch setting as shown in Table 44.

Table 44 — Factory Settings, High-Pressure

Switch (Fixed)

UNIT

All 30MP015-045;

30MPA050-071, 30MPW050-071

High Condensing

30MPW050-071 558 3848 435 3000 HK02ZZ003

CUTOUT CUT-IN

Psig kPa Psig kPa

650 4482 500 3447 HK02ZZ001

Clear the alarm using the scrolling marquee display. The unit should restart after the compressor anti-short-cycle delay, built into the unit control module, expires.

PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each unit is equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer. These inputs to the MBB are not only used to monitor the status of the unit, but also to maintain operation of the chiller within the compressor

PART

NUMBER

manufacturer’s specified limits. The input to the MBB from the suction pressure transducer is also used to protect the compressor from operating at low pressure conditions. If suction return gas thermistors are installed, then additional low superheat conditions are detected. In some cases, the unit may not be able to run at full capacity. The control module will automatically reduce the capacity of a circuit as needed to maintain specified maximum/minimum operating pressures.

COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION

WARNING

On medium temperature brine units, the anti-freeze solution must be properly mixed to prevent freezing at a temperature of at least 15 F (8.3 C) below the leaving-fluid temperature set point. Failure to provide the proper antifreeze solution mixture is considered abuse and may impair or otherwise negatively impact the Carrier warranty.

The main base board (MBB) monitors cooler leaving fluid temperature at all times. The MBB will rapidly remove stages of capacity as necessary to prevent freezing conditions due to the rapid loss of load or low cooler fluid flow.

When the cooler is exposed to lower temperatures (40 F [4.4 C] or below), freeze-up protection is required using inhibited ethylene or propylene glycol.

Thermistors — Electronic control uses up to five 5,000-

ohmthermistors to sense temperatures used to control operation of the chiller. Thermistors EWT, LWT, RGT.A, CNDE, CNDL, and OAT are identical in their temperature and voltage drop performance. The SPT space temperature thermistor has a 10,000-ohm input channel and it has a different set of temperature vs. resistance and voltage drop performance. Resistance values at various temperatures are listed in Tables 45-49. For dual chiller operation, a dual chiller sensor is required which is a 5,000-ohm thermistor.

REPLACING THERMISTORS (EWT, LWT, RGT, CNDE, CNDL) — Add a small amount of thermal conductive grease to the thermistor well and end of probe. For all probes, tighten the retaining nut ¼ turn past finger tight. See Fig. 30.

THERMISTOR/TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK — A high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform

this check.

1. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate themistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the main base board (see Fig. 31).

2. Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor temperature from Tables 45-49.

3. To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type temperature measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading. Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature determined from thermistor voltage reading should be close, ± 5° F (3° C) if care was taken in applying thermocouple and taking readings.

If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature (freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, by determining the resistance with chiller shut down and thermistor disconnected from J8. Compare the values determined with the value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the scrolling marquee display.

Pressure Transducers — The suction and discharge

transducers are different part numbers and can be distinguished by the color of the transducer body, suction (yellow) and discharge (red). No pressure transducer calibration is required.

The transducers operate on a 5 vdc supply, which is generated

Fig. 30 — Thermistor Well

Fig. 31 — Thermistor Connections to

Main Base Board, J8 Connector

LEGEND

ACCSY — Accessory DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer EFT — Entering Fluid Temperature LFT — Leaving Fluid Temperature LWT — Leaving Water Temperature Sensor LVT — Low Voltage Terminal OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor RGT — Return Gas Temperature Sensor SEN — Sensor Terminal Block SPT — Space Temperature Sensor

Fig. 32 — Chilled Water Flow Switch

a30-499

NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters.

by the main base board (MBB). See Fig. 31 for transducer connections to the J8 connector on the MBB.

TROUBLESHOOTING — If a transducer is suspected of being faulty, first check supply voltage to the transducer. Supply voltage should be 5 vdc ± 0.2 v. If supply voltage is correct, compare pressure reading displayed on the scrolling marquee display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure gage. Pressure readings should be within ± 15 psig. If the two readings are not reasonably close, replace the pressure transducer.

Chilled Water Flow Switch — A factory-installed

flow switch is installed in the leaving fluid piping for all units. This is a thermal-dispersion flow switch with no field adjustments. The switch is set for approximately 0.5 ft/sec of flow. The sensor tip houses two thermistors and a heater element. One thermistor is located in the sensor tip, closest to the flowing fluid. See Fig. 32. This thermistor is used to detect changes in the flow velocity of the liquid. The second thermistor is bonded to the cylindrical wall and is affected only by changes in the temperature of the liquid. The thermistors are positioned to be in close contact with the wall of the sensor probe and, at the same time, to be kept separated from each other within the confines of the probe.

In order to sense flow, it is necessary to heat one of the thermistors in the probe. When power is applied, the tip of the probe is heated. As the fluid starts to flow, heat will be carried away from the sensor tip. Cooling of the first thermistor is a function of how fast heat is conducted away by the flowing liquid.

The difference in temperature between the two thermistors provides a measurement of fluid velocity past the sensor probe. When fluid velocity is high, more heat will be carried away from the heated thermistor and the temperature differential will be small. As fluid velocity decreases, less heat will be taken from the heated thermistor and there will be an increase in temperature differential.

When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate, then the output is switched on, sending 24 vac to the MBB to prove flow has been established.

For recommended maintenance, check the flow switch operation. If operation is erratic check the sensor tip for build-up every 6 months. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. If necessary, build-up (e.g., lime) can be removed with a common vinegar cleansing agent.

The flow sensor cable is provided with (3) LEDs that indicate if 24 vac power is present and also status of the switch contacts. The LEDs are as follows:

• Green LED ON – 24 vac present

• One Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch OPEN

• Two Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch CLOSED

If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring, follow the steps below to correct the situation:

1. Check to confirm that the field-installed strainer is clean. Use the blow-down valve provided or remove the screen and clean it. For the case of VFD controlled pumps, ensure that the minimum speed setting has not been changed.

2. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler and compare this to the system requirements.

3. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the terminal block are secure.

4. Check for wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise when viewed from motor end of pump.

5/8 in. HEX

1/4-18 NPT

6" MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

MAIN

BASE

BOARD

A30-6018

Table 45 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–25 3.699 98,010 –24 3.689 94,707 –23 3.679 91,522 –22 3.668 88,449 –21 3.658 85,486 –20 3.647 82,627 –19 3.636 79,871 –18 3.624 77,212 –17 3.613 74,648 –16 3.601 72,175 –15 3.588 69,790 –14 3.576 67,490 –13 3.563 65,272 –12 3.550 63,133 –11 3.536 61,070 –10 3.523 59,081

–9 3.509 57,162 –8 3.494 55,311 –7 3.480 53,526 –6 3.465 51,804 –5 3.450 50,143 –4 3.434 48,541 –3 3.418 46,996 –2 3.402 45,505 –1 3.386 44,066

0 3.369 42,679 1 3.352 41,339 2 3.335 40,047 3 3.317 38,800 4 3.299 37,596 5 3.281 36,435 6 3.262 35,313 7 3.243 34,231 8 3.224 33,185

9 3.205 32,176 10 3.185 31,202 11 3.165 30,260 12 3.145 29,351 13 3.124 28,473 14 3.103 27,624 15 3.082 26,804 16 3.060 26,011 17 3.038 25,245 18 3.016 24,505 19 2.994 23,789 20 2.972 23,096 21 2.949 22,427 22 2.926 21,779 23 2.903 21,153 24 2.879 20,547 25 2.856 19,960 26 2.832 19,393 27 2.808 18,843 28 2.784 18,311 29 2.759 17,796 30 2.735 17,297 31 2.710 16,814 32 2.685 16,346 33 2.660 15,892 34 2.634 15,453 35 2.609 15,027 36 2.583 14,614 37 2.558 14,214 38 2.532 13,826 39 2.506 13,449 40 2.480 13,084 41 2.454 12,730 42 2.428 12,387 43 2.402 12,053 44 2.376 11,730 45 2.349 11,416 46 2.323 11,112 47 2.296 10,816 48 2.270 10,529 49 2.244 10,250 50 2.217 9,979 51 2.191 9,717 52 2.165 9,461 53 2.138 9,213 54 2.112 8,973 55 2.086 8,739 56 2.060 8,511 57 2.034 8,291 58 2.008 8,076

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

59 1.982 7,686 60 1.956 7,665 61 1.930 7,468 62 1.905 7,277 63 1.879 7,091 64 1.854 6,911 65 1.829 6,735 66 1.804 6,564 67 1.779 6,399 68 1.754 6,238 69 1.729 6,081 70 1.705 5,929 71 1.681 5,781 72 1.656 5,637 73 1.632 5,497 74 1.609 5,361 75 1.585 5,229 76 1.562 5,101 77 1.538 4,976 78 1.516 4,855 79 1.493 4,737 80 1.470 4,622 81 1.448 4,511 82 1.426 4,403 83 1.404 4,298 84 1.382 4,196 85 1.361 4,096 86 1.340 4,000 87 1.319 3,906 88 1.298 3,814 89 1.278 3,726 90 1.257 3,640 91 1.237 3,556 92 1.217 3,474 93 1.198 3,395 94 1.179 3,318 95 1.160 3,243 96 1.141 3,170 97 1.122 3,099 98 1.104 3,031

99 1.086 2,964 100 1.068 2,898 101 1.051 2,835 102 1.033 2,773 103 1.016 2,713 104 0.999 2,655 105 0.983 2,597 106 0.966 2,542 107 0.950 2,488 108 0.934 2,436 109 0.918 2,385 110 0.903 2,335 111 0.888 2,286 112 0.873 2,239 113 0.858 2,192 114 0.843 2,147 115 0.829 2,103 116 0.815 2,060 117 0.801 2,018 118 0.787 1,977 119 0.774 1,937 120 0.761 1,898 121 0.748 1,860 122 0.735 1,822 123 0.723 1,786 124 0.710 1,750 125 0.698 1,715 126 0.686 1,680 127 0.674 1,647 128 0.663 1,614 129 0.651 1,582 130 0.640 1,550 131 0.629 1,519 132 0.618 1,489 133 0.608 1,459 134 0.597 1,430 135 0.587 1,401 136 0.577 1,373 137 0.567 1,345 138 0.557 1,318 139 0.548 1,291 140 0.538 1,265 141 0.529 1,240 142 0.520 1,214

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

143 0.511 1,190 144 0.502 1,165 145 0.494 1,141 146 0.485 1,118 147 0.477 1,095 148 0.469 1,072 149 0.461 1,050 150 0.453 1,029 151 0.445 1,007 152 0.438 986 153 0.430 965 154 0.423 945 155 0.416 925 156 0.408 906 157 0.402 887 158 0.395 868 159 0.388 850 160 0.381 832 161 0.375 815 162 0.369 798 163 0.362 782 164 0.356 765 165 0.350 750 166 0.344 734 167 0.339 719 168 0.333 705 169 0.327 690 170 0.322 677 171 0.317 663 172 0.311 650 173 0.306 638 174 0.301 626 175 0.296 614 176 0.291 602 177 0.286 591 178 0.282 581 179 0.277 570 180 0.272 561 181 0.268 551 182 0.264 542 183 0.259 533 184 0.255 524 185 0.251 516 186 0.247 508 187 0.243 501 188 0.239 494 189 0.235 487 190 0.231 480 191 0.228 473 192 0.224 467 193 0.220 461 194 0.217 456 195 0.213 450 196 0.210 445 197 0.206 439 198 0.203 434 199 0.200 429 200 0.197 424 201 0.194 419 202 0.191 415 203 0.188 410 204 0.185 405 205 0.182 401 206 0.179 396 207 0.176 391 208 0.173 386 209 0.171 382 210 0.168 377 211 0.165 372 212 0.163 367 213 0.160 361 214 0.158 356 215 0.155 350 216 0.153 344 217 0.151 338 218 0.148 332 219 0.146 325 220 0.144 318 221 0.142 311 222 0.140 304 223 0.138 297 224 0.135 289 225 0.133 282

(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, CNDE, CNDL, Dual Chiller, and OAT)

Table 46 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–32 3.705 100,260 –31 3.687 94,165 –30 3.668 88,480 –29 3.649 83,170 –28 3.629 78,125 –27 3.608 73,580 –26 3.586 69,250 –25 3.563 65,205 –24 3.539 61,420 –23 3.514 57,875 –22 3.489 54,555 –21 3.462 51,450 –20 3.434 48,536 –19 3.406 45,807 –18 3.376 43,247 –17 3.345 40,845 –16 3.313 38,592 –15 3.281 38,476 –14 3.247 34,489 –13 3.212 32,621 –12 3.177 30,866 –11 3.140 29,216 –10 3.103 27,633

–9 3.065 26,202 –8 3.025 24,827 –7 2.985 23,532 –6 2.945 22,313 –5 2.903 21,163 –4 2.860 20,079 –3 2.817 19,058 –2 2.774 18,094 –1 2.730 17,184

0 2.685 16,325 1 2.639 15,515 2 2.593 14,749 3 2.547 14,026 4 2.500 13,342 5 2.454 12,696 6 2.407 12,085 7 2.360 11,506 8 2.312 10,959

9 2.265 10,441 10 2.217 9,949 11 2.170 9,485 12 2.123 9,044 13 2.076 8,627 14 2.029 8,231

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

15 1.982 7,855 16 1.935 7,499 17 1.889 7,161 18 1.844 6,840 19 1.799 6,536 20 1.754 6,246 21 1.710 5,971 22 1.666 5,710 23 1.623 5,461 24 1.580 5,225 25 1.538 5,000 26 1.497 4,786 27 1.457 4,583 28 1.417 4,389 29 1.378 4,204 30 1.340 4,028 31 1.302 3,861 32 1.265 3,701 33 1.229 3,549 34 1.194 3,404 35 1.160 3,266 36 1.126 3,134 37 1.093 3,008 38 1.061 2,888 39 1.030 2,773 40 0.999 2,663 41 0.969 2,559 42 0.940 2,459 43 0.912 2,363 44 0.885 2,272 45 0.858 2,184 46 0.832 2,101 47 0.807 2,021 48 0.782 1,944 49 0.758 1,871 50 0.735 1,801 51 0.713 1,734 52 0.691 1,670 53 0.669 1,609 54 0.649 1,550 55 0.629 1,493 56 0.610 1,439 57 0.591 1,387 58 0.573 1,337 59 0.555 1,290 60 0.538 1,244 61 0.522 1,200

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

62 0.506 1,158 63 0.490 1,118 64 0.475 1,079 65 0.461 1,041 66 0.447 1,006 67 0.433 971 68 0.420 938 69 0.407 906 70 0.395 876 71 0.383 836 72 0.371 805 73 0.360 775 74 0.349 747 75 0.339 719 76 0.329 693 77 0.319 669 78 0.309 645 79 0.300 623 80 0.291 602 81 0.283 583 82 0.274 564 83 0.266 547 84 0.258 531 85 0.251 516 86 0.244 502 87 0.237 489 88 0.230 477 89 0.223 466 90 0.217 456 91 0.211 446 92 0.204 436 93 0.199 427 94 0.193 419 95 0.188 410 96 0.182 402 97 0.177 393 98 0.172 385

99 0.168 376 100 0.163 367 101 0.158 357 102 0.154 346 103 0.150 335 104 0.146 324 105 0.142 312 106 0.138 299 107 0.134 285

(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, CNDE, CNDL, Dual Chiller, and OAT)

Table 47 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–25 4.758 196,453 –24 4.750 189,692 –23 4.741 183,300 –22 4.733 177,000 –21 4.724 171,079 –20 4.715 165,238 –19 4.705 159,717 –18 4.696 154,344 –17 4.686 149,194 –16 4.676 144,250 –15 4.665 139,443 –14 4.655 134,891 –13 4.644 130,402 –12 4.633 126,183 –11 4.621 122,018 –10 4.609 118,076

–9 4.597 114,236 –8 4.585 110,549 –7 4.572 107,006 –6 4.560 103,558 –5 4.546 100,287 –4 4.533 97,060 –3 4.519 94,020 –2 4.505 91,019 –1 4.490 88,171

0 4.476 85,396 1 4.461 82,729 2 4.445 80,162 3 4.429 77,662 4 4.413 75,286 5 4.397 72,940 6 4.380 70,727 7 4.363 68,542 8 4.346 66,465

9 4.328 64,439 10 4.310 62,491 11 4.292 60,612 12 4.273 58,781 13 4.254 57,039 14 4.235 55,319 15 4.215 53,693 16 4.195 52,086 17 4.174 50,557 18 4.153 49,065 19 4.132 47,627 20 4.111 46,240 21 4.089 44,888 22 4.067 43,598 23 4.044 42,324 24 4.021 41,118 25 3.998 39,926 26 3.975 38,790 27 3.951 37,681 28 3.927 36,610 29 3.903 35,577 30 3.878 34,569 31 3.853 33,606 32 3.828 32,654 33 3.802 31,752 34 3.776 30,860 35 3.750 30,009 36 3.723 29,177 37 3.697 28,373 38 3.670 27,597 39 3.654 26,838 40 3.615 26,113 41 3.587 25,396 42 3.559 24,715 43 3.531 24,042 44 3.503 23,399 45 3.474 22,770 46 3.445 22,161 47 3.416 21,573 48 3.387 20,998 49 3.357 20,447 50 3.328 19,903 51 3.298 19,386 52 3.268 18,874 53 3.238 18,384 54 3.208 17,904 55 3.178 17,441 56 3.147 16,991 57 3.117 16,552 58 3.086 16,131 59 3.056 15,714 60 3.025 15,317

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

61 2.994 14,925 62 2.963 14,549 63 2.932 14,180 64 2.901 13,824 65 2.870 13,478 66 2.839 13,139 67 2.808 12,814 68 2.777 12,493 69 2.746 12,187 70 2.715 11,884 71 2.684 11,593 72 2.653 11,308 73 2.622 11,031 74 2.592 10,764 75 2.561 10,501 76 2.530 10,249 77 2.500 10,000 78 2.470 9,762 79 2.439 9,526 80 2.409 9,300 81 2.379 9,078 82 2.349 8,862 83 2.319 8,653 84 2.290 8,448 85 2.260 8,251 86 2.231 8,056 87 2.202 7,869 88 2.173 7,685 89 2.144 7,507 90 2.115 7,333 91 2.087 7,165 92 2.059 6,999 93 2.030 6,838 94 2.003 6,683 95 1.975 6,530 96 1.948 6,383 97 1.921 6,238 98 1.894 6,098

99 1.867 5,961 100 1.841 5,827 101 1.815 5,698 102 1.789 5,571 103 1.763 5,449 104 1.738 5,327 105 1.713 5,210 106 1.688 5,095 107 1.663 4,984 108 1.639 4,876 109 1.615 4,769 110 1.591 4,666 111 1.567 4,564 112 1.544 4,467 113 1.521 4,370 114 1.498 4,277 115 1.475 4,185 116 1.453 4,096 117 1.431 4,008 118 1.409 3,923 119 1.387 3,840 120 1.366 3,759 121 1.345 3,681 122 1.324 3,603 123 1.304 3,529 124 1.284 3,455 125 1.264 3,383 126 1.244 3,313 127 1.225 3,244 128 1.206 3,178 129 1.187 3,112 130 1.168 3,049 131 1.150 2,986 132 1.132 2,926 133 1.114 2,866 134 1.096 2,809 135 1.079 2,752 136 1.062 2,697 137 1.045 2,643 138 1.028 2,590 139 1.012 2,539 140 0.996 2,488 141 0.980 2,439 142 0.965 2,391 143 0.949 2,343 144 0.934 2,297 145 0.919 2,253 146 0.905 2,209

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

147 0.890 2,166 148 0.876 2,124 149 0.862 2,083 150 0.848 2,043 151 0.835 2,003 152 0.821 1,966 153 0.808 1,928 154 0.795 1,891 155 0.782 1,855 156 0.770 1,820 157 0.758 1,786 158 0.745 1,752 159 0.733 1,719 160 0.722 1,687 161 0.710 1,656 162 0.699 1,625 163 0.687 1,594 164 0.676 1,565 165 0.666 1,536 166 0.655 1,508 167 0.645 1,480 168 0.634 1,453 169 0.624 1,426 170 0.614 1,400 171 0.604 1,375 172 0.595 1,350 173 0.585 1,326 174 0.576 1,302 175 0.567 1,278 176 0.558 1,255 177 0.549 1,233 178 0.540 1,211 179 0.532 1,190 180 0.523 1,169 181 0.515 1,148 182 0.507 1,128 183 0.499 1,108 184 0.491 1,089 185 0.483 1,070 186 0.476 1,052 187 0.468 1,033 188 0.461 1,016 189 0.454 998 190 0.447 981 191 0.440 964 192 0.433 947 193 0.426 931 194 0.419 915 195 0.413 900 196 0.407 885 197 0.400 870 198 0.394 855 199 0.388 841 200 0.382 827 201 0.376 814 202 0.370 800 203 0.365 787 204 0.359 774 205 0.354 762 206 0.349 749 207 0.343 737 208 0.338 725 209 0.333 714 210 0.328 702 211 0.323 691 212 0.318 680 213 0.314 670 214 0.309 659 215 0.305 649 216 0.300 639 217 0.296 629 218 0.292 620 219 0.288 610 220 0.284 601 221 0.279 592 222 0.275 583 223 0.272 574 224 0.268 566 225 0.264 557

(For SPT)

Table 48 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–32 4.762 200,510 –31 4.748 188,340 –30 4.733 177,000 –29 4.716 166,342 –28 4.700 156,404 –27 4.682 147,134 –26 4.663 138,482 –25 4.644 130,402 –24 4.624 122,807 –23 4.602 115,710 –22 4.580 109,075 –21 4.557 102,868 –20 4.533 97,060 –19 4.508 91,588 –18 4.482 86,463 –17 4.455 81,662 –16 4.426 77,162 –15 4.397 72,940 –14 4.367 68,957 –13 4.335 65,219 –12 4.303 61,711 –11 4.269 58,415 –10 4.235 55,319

–9 4.199 52,392 –8 4.162 49,640 –7 4.124 47,052 –6 4.085 44,617 –5 4.044 42,324 –4 4.003 40,153 –3 3.961 38,109 –2 3.917 36,182 –1 3.873 34,367

0 3.828 32,654 1 3.781 31,030 2 3.734 29,498 3 3.686 28,052 4 3.637 26,686 5 3.587 25,396 6 3.537 24,171 7 3.485 23,013 8 3.433 21,918

9 3.381 20,883 10 3.328 19,903 11 3.274 18,972 12 3.220 18,090 13 3.165 17,255 14 3.111 16,464

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

15 3.056 15,714 16 3.000 15,000 17 2.944 14,323 18 2.889 13,681 19 2.833 13,071 20 2.777 12,493 21 2.721 11,942 22 2.666 11,418 23 2.610 10,921 24 2.555 10,449 25 2.500 10,000 26 2.445 9,571 27 2.391 9,164 28 2.337 8,776 29 2.284 8,407 30 2.231 8,056 31 2.178 7,720 32 2.127 7,401 33 2.075 7,096 34 2.025 6,806 35 1.975 6,530 36 1.926 6,266 37 1.878 6,014 38 1.830 5,774 39 1.784 5,546 40 1.738 5,327 41 1.692 5,117 42 1.648 4,918 43 1.605 4,727 44 1.562 4,544 45 1.521 4,370 46 1.480 4,203 47 1.439 4,042 48 1.400 3,889 49 1.362 3,743 50 1.324 3,603 51 1.288 3,469 52 1.252 3,340 53 1.217 3,217 54 1.183 3,099 55 1.150 2,986 56 1.117 2,878 57 1.086 2,774 58 1.055 2,675 59 1.025 2,579 60 0.996 2,488 61 0.968 2,400

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

62 0.940 2,315 63 0.913 2,235 64 0.887 2,157 65 0.862 2,083 66 0.837 2,011 67 0.813 1,943 68 0.790 1,876 69 0.767 1,813 70 0.745 1,752 71 0.724 1,693 72 0.703 1,637 73 0.683 1,582 74 0.663 1,530 75 0.645 1,480 76 0.626 1,431 77 0.608 1,385 78 0.591 1,340 79 0.574 1,297 80 0.558 1,255 81 0.542 1,215 82 0.527 1,177 83 0.512 1,140 84 0.497 1,104 85 0.483 1,070 86 0.470 1,037 87 0.457 1,005 88 0.444 974 89 0.431 944 90 0.419 915 91 0.408 889 92 0.396 861 93 0.386 836 94 0.375 811 95 0.365 787 96 0.355 764 97 0.345 742 98 0.336 721

99 0.327 700 100 0.318 680 101 0.310 661 102 0.302 643 103 0.294 626 104 0.287 609 105 0.279 592 106 0.272 576 107 0.265 561

(For SPT)

TEMP

(C)

-40 -40 2,889,600

-35 -31 2,087,220

-30 -22 1,522,200

-25 -13 1,121,440

-20 -4 834,720

-15 5 627,280

-10 14 475,740

-5 23 363,990 032280,820 541218,410

10 50 171,170 15 59 135,140 20 68 107,440 25 77 86,000 30 86 69,280 35 95 56,160 40 104 45,810 45 113 37,580 50 122 30,990 55 131 25,680 60 140 21,400 70 158 15,070

TEMP

(F)

Table 49 — 86K Thermistor vs Resistance (DTT)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(C)

75 167 12,730 80 176 10,790 85 185 9,200 90 194 7,870 95 203 6,770 100 212 5,850 105 221 5,090 110 230 4,450 115 239 3,870 120 248 3,350 125 257 2,920 130 266 2,580 135 275 2,280 140 284 2,020 145 293 1,800 150 302 1,590 155 311 1,390 160 320 1,250 165 329 1,120 170 338 1,010 175 347 920 180 356 830

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

Strainer — Periodic cleaning of the required field-installed

strainer is required. Pressure drop across strainer in excess of 3 psi (21 kPa) indicates the need for cleaning. Normal (clean) pressure drop is approximately 1 psi (6.9 kPa). Open the blowdown valve to clean the strainer. If required, shut the chiller down and remove the strainer screen to clean. When strainer has been cleaned, enter ‘YES’ for Strainer Maintenance Done (Run Status

PM

S.T.MN).

Replacing Defective Modules — The Comfort-

Link replacement modules are shown in Table 50. If the main base board (MBB) has been replaced, verify that all configuration data is correct. Follow the Configuration mode table and verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT, OPT1 and OPT2 are correct. Any additional field-installed accessories or options (RSET, SLCT sub-modes) should also be verified as well as any specific time and maintenance schedules.

Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 30MP Liquid Chillers (completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder. This information is needed later in this procedure. If the checklist does not exist, fill out the current information in the Configuration mode on a new checklist. Tailor the various options and configurations as needed for this particular installation.

WARNING

1. Check that all power to unit is off. Carefully disconnect all wires from the defective module by unplugging its connectors.

2. Remove the defective module by removing its mounting screws with a Phillips screwdriver, and removing the module from the control box. Save the screws later use.

3. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switches (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the defective module.

NOTE: Handle boards by mounting standoffs only to avoid electrostatic discharge.

4. Package the defective module in the carton of the new module for return to Carrier.

5. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.

6. Reinstall all module connectors. For accessory Navigator™ device replacement, make sure the plug is installed at TB3 in the LEN connector.

7. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring power.

8. Verify the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTROL switch is in the OFF position.

9. Restore control power. Verify that all module red LEDs blink in unison. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking and that the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ display is communicating correctly.

10. Verify all configuration information, settings, set points and schedules. Return the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTROL switch to its previous position.

Table 50 — Replacement Modules

MODULE

Main Base Board (MBB) 30MP500346 Scrolling Marquee Display HK50AA031 Energy Management Module (EMM) 30GT515218 Navigator Display HK50AA033 Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) 30GT515217

REPLACEMENT

PART NO.

(with Software)

MAINTENANCE

Recommended Maintenance Schedule —

following are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite conditions may dictate that maintenance tasks are performed more often than recommended. Routine

Every month:

• Check water quality. Inspection interval to be determined

• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrig-

Every 3 months (for all machines):

• Check refrigerant charge.

• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant

• Check chilled water flow switch operation.

• Check compressor oil level. Every 6 months (for all machines):

• Clean chilled water/condenser water flow switch sensor

Every 12 months (for all machines):

• Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.

• Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.

• Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than

• Check to be sure that the proper concentration of anti-

• Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.

• Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure

• Check chilled water and condenser strainers, clean as

• Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all

• Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled

• Check for excessive condenser approach (Saturated Dis-

by site conditions and water quality specialist.

erant loss and presence of moisture.

leaks, repair as necessary.

tip.

± 2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer.

freeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable.

drop, replace as necessary. The 30MP015-045 units contain a hermetic filter drier. The 30MP050-071 units contain a replaceable core type filter drier.

necessary.

components.

Water Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) which may indicate fouling. Clean evaporator if necessary.

charge Pressure – Leaving Condenser Water Temperature) which may indicate fouling. Clean condenser if necessary (30MPW only).

The

TROUBLESHOOTING

Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart —

ble causes for unit stoppage and reset methods are shown below and in Table 51. Refer to Fig. 2-6 for component arrangement and control wiring diagrams.

GENERAL POWER FAILURE — After power is restored, restart is automatic through normal MBB start-up.

UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH IS OFF — When the switch is OFF, the unit will stop immediately. Place the switch in the ENABLE position for local switch control or in the REMOTE CONTROL position for control through remote control closure.

Possi-

Table 51 — Troubleshooting

SYMPTOMS CAUSE REMEDY

Compressor Cycles Off on Loss of Charge

Compressor Cycles Off on Out of Range Condition

Compressor Shuts Down on High-Pressure Control

Unit Operates Too Long or Continuously

Unusual or Loud System Noises

Compressor Loses Oil Leak in system Repair leak.

Hot Liquid Line Shortage of refrigerant due to leak Repair leak and recharge. Frosted Liquid Line Restricted filter drier Replace filter drier. Frosted Suction Line Expansion valve admitting excess refrigerant (note: this is a

Freeze-Up Improper charging Make sure a full quantity of fluid is flowing through the cooler

CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN — After the problem causing the loss of flow has been corrected, reset is manual by resetting the alarm with the scrolling marquee.

OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER(S) — Determine the cause of the failure and correct. Reset circuit breaker(s). Restart is automatic after MBB start-up cycle is complete.

COOLING LOAD SATISFIED — Unit shuts down when cooling load has been satisfied. Unit restarts when required to satisfy leaving fluid temperature set point.

THERMISTOR FAILURE — If a thermistor fails in either an open or shorted condition, the unit will be shut down. Replace EWT, or LWT as required. Unit restarts automatically, but must be reset manually by resetting the alarm with the scrolling marquee.

CAUTION

If unit stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of the safety devices listed, determine and correct cause before attempting another restart.

Loss of charge control. Acting erratically. Repair leak and recharge.

Low refrigerant charge Add refrigerant. Low suction temperature Raise cooler leaving fluid temperature set point. Thermistor failure Replace thermistor. System load was reduced faster than controller could

remove stages

Temperature controller deadband setting is too low Raise deadband setting. High-pressure control acting erratically Replace control. Noncondensables in system Purge system. Condenser scaled/dirty (30MPW) Clean condenser. Fans in remote condensing unit (30MPA only) not operating Repair or replace if defective. System overcharged with refrigerant Reduce charge. Low refrigerant charge Add refrigerant. Control contacts fused Replace control. Air in system Purge system. Partially plugged or plugged expansion valve or filter drier Clean or replace as needed. Defective insulation Replace or repair as needed. Service load Keep doors and windows closed. Damaged compressor Check compressor and replace if necessary. Piping vibration Support piping as required.

Expansion valve hissing Check refrigerant charge.

Compressor noisy Replace compressor (worn bearings).

Compressor not pumping Advanced scroll temperature protection is active. Determine

Mechanical damage (Failed seals or broken scrolls) Replace compressor. Oil trapped in line Check piping for oil traps.

normal condition for brine applications) Stuck TXV (thermostatic expansion valve) Replace valve if defective.

System not drained for winter shutdown Recommended that system be filled with an appropriate gly-

Loose thermistor Verify thermistors are fully inserted in wells.

Replace control.

Unit will restart after fluid temperature rises back into the control band. Avoid rapidly removing system load or increase loop volume.

Check for loose pipe connections or damaged compressor

Check for plugged liquid line filter drier.

Check for loose compressor holddown bolts. Operation outside of compressor operating envelope. Con-

sider head pressure control, clean condenser. Check water flow (cooler and condenser).

high discharge temperature reason.

Replace valve if defective.

while charging, and suction pressure in cooler is equal to or greater than pressure corresponding to 32 F (0° C).

col mixture to prevent freezing of pumps and fluid tubing.

ENABLING AND DISABLING COMPRESSORS — Compressors in the 30MP units can be enabled or disabled in the controls. To enable or disable a compressor, toggle the value in the Configuration



SERV menu for each individual

compressor. COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE — A

disk-type check valve in the discharge of the compressor prevents high pressure discharge gas from flowing rapidly back through the compressor at shutdown. This same check valve prevents a high to low side bypass in multiple compressor circuits.

LOW SATURATED SUCTION — Several conditions can lead to low saturated suction alarms and the chiller controls have several override modes built in which will attempt to keep the chiller from shutting down. Low fluid flow, low refrigerant charge and plugged filter driers are the main causes for this condition. To avoid permanent damage and potential freezing of the system, do NOT repeatedly reset these alert and/or alarm conditions without identifying and correcting the cause(s).

COMPRESSOR SAFETIES — The 30MP units with Com- fortLink controls include a compressor protection board that protects the operation of each of the compressors. Each board senses the presence or absence of current to each compressor.

If there is a command for a compressor to run and there is

Fig. 33 — Advanced Scroll Temperature

Protection Label

Fig. 34 — Recommended Minimum Cool Down

Time After Compressor is Stopped*

100

110

120

0 102030405060708090

Recommended Cooling Time

(Minutes)

Compressor Unloaded Run Time (Minutes)

*Times are approximate. NOTE: Various factors, including high humidity, high ambient temperature, and the presence of a sound blanket will increase cool-down times.

no current, then one of the following safeties or conditions have turned the compressor off:

Compressor Overcurrent

— All compressors have internal line breaks or a motor protection device located in the compressor electrical box.

Compressor Short Circuit

— There will not be current if the compressor circuit breaker that provides short circuit protection has tripped.

Compressor Motor Over Temperature

— The internal line-

break or over temperature switch has opened. High-Pressure Switch Trip

— The high-pressure switch has opened. See Table 44 for the factory settings for the fixed highpressure switch.

ASTP Protection Trip

(30MP015-045 Only) — All non-digital Copeland compressors are equipped with an advanced scroll temperature protection (ASTP). A label located above the terminal box identifies models that contain this technology. See Fig. 33.

Advanced scroll temperature protection is a form of internal discharge temperature protection that unloads the scroll compressor when the internal temperature reaches approximately 300 F (149 C). At this temperature, an internal bi-metal disk valve opens and causes the scroll elements to separate, which stops compression. Suction and discharge pressures balance while the motor continues to run. The longer the compressor runs unloaded, the longer it must cool before the bi-metal disk resets. See Fig. 34 for approximate reset times.

automatically before the motor protector resets, which may take up to 2 hours.

High Discharge Gas Temperature Protection

— Units equipped with optional digital compressors have an additional thermistor located on the discharge line. If discharge temperature exceeds 265 F (129.4 C), the digital compressor will be shut off.

Alarms will also occur if the current sensor board malfunctions or is not properly connected to its assigned digital input. If the compressor is commanded OFF and the current sensor reads ON, an alert is generated. This will indicate that a compressor contactor has failed closed. In this case, a special mode, Compressor Stuck on Control, will be enabled and all other compressors will be turned off. An alarm will then be enabled to indicate that service is required. Outdoor fans will continue to operate. The condenser output is turned on immediately.

Motor Overload Protection

COPELAND* COMPRESSORS MODELS WITH ELECTRICAL CODE TF — Models with a “TF” in the electrical code (i.e., ZP182KCE-TFE) have an internal line break motor overload located in the center of the Y of the motor windings. This overload disconnects all three legs of the motor from power in case of an over-current or over-temperature condition. The overload reacts to a combination of motor current and motor winding temperature. The internal overload protects against single phasing. Time must be allowed for the motor to cool down before the overload will reset. If current monitoring to the compressor is available, the system controller can take advantage of the compressor internal overload operation. The controller can lock out the compressor if current draw is not coincident with contactor energizing, implying that the compressor has shut off on its internal overload. This will prevent unnecessary compressor cycling on a fault condition until corrective action can be taken.

COPELAND COMPRESSORS MODELS WITH ELECTRICAL CODE TW OR TE

To manually reset ASTP, the compressor should be stopped and allowed to cool. If the compressor is not stopped, the motor will run until the motor protector trips, which occurs up to 90 minutes later. Advanced scroll temperature protection will reset

* Copeland is a registered trademark of Emerson Climate

Technologies.

CAUTION

The electronic motor protection module is a safety device that must not be bypassed or compressor damage may result.

Models with a “TW” or “TE” in the electrical code (i.e., ZP182KCE-TWD or ZP182KCE-TED) have a motor overload system that consists of an external electronic control module connected to a chain of four thermistors embedded in the motor windings. The module will trip and remain off for a minimum of 30 minutes if the motor temperature exceeds a preset point to allow the scrolls to cool down after the motor temperature limit has been reached. It may take as long as two hours for the motor to cool down before the overload will reset.

NOTE: Turning off power to the module will reset it immediately.

CAUTION

Restoring the compressor sooner may cause a destructive temperature build up in the scrolls.

For this reason, module power must never be switched with the control circuit voltage.

Current sensing boards monitor to the compressor current. The ComfortLink control system takes advantage of the compressor overload operation by locking out the compressor if current draw is not detected. This will prevent unnecessary compressor cycling on a fault condition until corrective action can be taken.

Kriwan Motor Protection Module Troubleshooting — Co-

LEGEND

1—Kriwan Motor Protection Module Power 2—Kriwan Control Circuit Connections 3—Motor Thermal Sensor

Fig. 35 — Kriwan Motor Protection Wiring

peland models with a “TW” in the electrical code (i.e., ZP182KCE-TWD), have a motor overload system that consists of an external Kriwan have been replaced by the CoreSense

electronic control module. These

†

communication module for motor protection. This section is included for reference, and contains instructions for replacing the Kriwan module with the CoreSense module in the field.

Follow the steps listed below to troubleshoot the Kriwan module in the field. See wiring diagram on terminal box cover, or Fig. 35.

WARNING

Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover removed. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire, resulting in personal injury or death.

WARNING

Exercise extreme caution when reading compressor currents when high-voltage power is on. Correct any of the problems described below before installing and running a replacement compressor. Wear safety glasses and gloves when handling refrigerants. Failure to follow this warning can cause fire, resulting in personal injury or death.

CAUTION

Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the machine may result.

123

reconnected, then the control circuit relay in the module is open. Remove the temporary jumper installed in Step

3. The thermistor protection chain now needs to be tested to determine if the module’s control circuit relay is open due to excessive internal temperatures or a faulty component. Check the thermistor protection chain located in the compressor as follows:

a. De-energize control circuit and module power. b. Remove the sensor leads from the module (S1 and

S2).

c. Measure the resistance of the thermistor protection

chain through these sensor leads with an ohm meter.

CAUTION

Use an ohmmeter with a maximum of 9 volts to check the sensor chain. The sensor chain is sensitive and easily damaged; no attempt should be made to check continuity through it with anything other than an ohmmeter. The application of any external voltage to the sensor chain may cause damage requiring the replacement of the compressor.

d. The diagnosis of this resistance reading is as

follows:

• 200 to 2250 ohms: Normal operating range

• 2750 ohms or greater: Compressor overheated. Allow time to cool.

• Zero resistance: Shorted sensor circuit. Replace the compressor.

• Infinite resistance: Open sensor circuit. Replace

the compressor.

4. If the resistance reading is abnormal, remove the sensor connector plug from the compressor and measure the resistance at the sensor fusite pins. This will determine if the abnormal reading was due to a faulty connector.

5. On initial start-up, and after any module trip, the resistance of the sensor chain must be below the module reset point before the module circuit will close. Reset values are 2250 to 3000 ohms.

6. If the sensor chain has a resistance that is below 2250 ohms, and the compressor will run with the control circuit bypassed, but will not run when connected properly, the solid-state module is defective and should be replaced. The replacement module must have the same supply voltage rating as the original module.

CoreSense Replacement of Kriwan Motor Protection Module — The Kriwan module has been replaced by the Core-

Sense communication module for motor protection. Minor wiring changes are required as described below.

1. De-energize control circuit and module power. Remove the control circuit wires from the module (terminals M1 and M2). Connect a jumper across these control circuit wires. This will bypass the control contact of the module.

CAUTION

The motor protection system within the compressor is now bypassed. Use this configuration to temporarily test module only.

2. Re-energize the control circuit and module power. If the compressor will not operate with the jumper installed, then the problem is external to the solid-state protection system. If the compressor operates with the module bypassed but will not operate when the module is

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation and service. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed.

WARNING

Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover removed. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire, resulting in personal injury or death.

* Kriwan is a registered trademark of Kriwan Industrie-Elektronik.

GmbH

† CoreSense is a registered trademark of Emerson Climate

Technologies.

Removing the Kriwan motor protection module:

HOLDING

TA B

HOLDING TA B

a38-7310

Fig. 36 — Kriwan Motor Protection Module

Removal

INSTALL IN THIS ORIENTATION

A38-7311

Fig. 37 — Compressor Motor Sensor Harness

Installation (under motor protection module)

ROCKER DOWN

O F F

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF

123 45678 9

OFF

A38-7812

Fig. 38 — CoreSense Communication DIP

Switch Settings for Kriwan Retrofit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T2 T1

L2L1

RED

BLACK

WHITE

VIOLET

HOLDING TA B

HOLDING

TA B

THERMISTOR WIRE HARNESS PLUGGED INTO 2X2 SOCKET

BLACK

WHITE

A38-7313

BLUE

M1/M2

Fig. 39 — CoreSense Communication Module

Mounting

MOTOR

PTC

CIRCUIT

SCROLL NTC CIRCUIT (NOT USED)

FOR FUTURE

USE

COMMON CONNECTION

a38-7308

Fig. 40 — CoreSense Communications

Motor Thermistor Plug

1. Disconnect and lock out the high voltage and control voltage supply to the unit.

2. Using a straight blade screwdriver, carefully depress the tabs holding the terminal cover to the terminal box to remove the terminal cover. Before proceeding, use a volt meter to verify that the power has been disconnected from the unit.

3. Using wire markers, label the M1, M2, T1, and T2 wires that are connected to the Kriwan module. Using needle nose pliers, remove the M1, M2, T1, T2, S1 and S2 wires from the Kriwan motor protector module.

4. Gently bend the holding tabs holding the Kriwan module in the terminal box and remove the Kriwan module from the terminal box. See Fig. 36.

5. Take note of the S1-S2 plug orientation on the compressor thermistor fusite. Remove the S1-S2 wire harness and plug from the compressor.

2. Review the DIP switch settings on the CoreSense module. DIP switch no. 1 should be ON (up position) and all other DIP switches should be OFF (down position). See Fig. 38.

3. Install the CoreSense module in the compressor terminal box as shown in Fig. 39, with the tabs holding the module in place. Route the thermistor wire harness as shown and plug the harness into the 2x2 socket on the CoreSense module.

4. Connect the previously labeled M1, M2, T1, and T2 wires to the appropriate terminals on the CoreSense module.

5. Connect the L1, L2, and L3 phase sensing wires to the L1, L2, and L3 compressor terminal block connections. See the compressor terminal cover diagram for identication of the L1, L2, and L3 terminal block connections.

6. Double-check the installation and make sure all connections are secure. Install the compressor terminal cover.

The CoreSense retrofit is complete and the system can be put back into service.

Installing the CoreSense communications module:

1. A new S1-S2 thermistor wiring harness is shipped with the CoreSense kit and must be used. The wiring harness connector block should be fully inserted on the three pins in the orientation shown in Fig. 37 for proper operation.

CoreSense Communications Module Troubleshooting — Copeland models with a "TE" in the electrical code (i.e., ZP182KCE-TED) have a motor overload system that consists of an external CoreSense communication electronic control module.

Motor thermistors are connected to the CoreSense commu-

nication module via a 2x2 plug (Fig. 40).

The CoreSense communications module has field configu-

Fig. 41 — CoreSense Communication Motor

Protection Wiring

rable DIP switches for addressing and configuring the module. The DIP switches should be addressed as shown in Table 52.

The CoreSense communication module has a green and a red light-emitting diode (LED). A solid green LED indicates the module is powered and operation is normal. A solid red LED indicates an internal problem with the module. If a solid red LED is encountered, power down the module (interrupt the T1-T2 power) for 30 seconds to reboot the module. If a solid red LED is persistent, change the CoreSense module.

The CoreSense module communicates warning codes via a green flashing LED. Warning codes do not result in a trip or lockout condition. Alert codes are communicated via a red flashing LED. Alert codes will result in a trip condition and possibly a lockout condition. See wiring diagram on terminal box cover, or Fig. 41. The flash code corresponds to the number of LED flashes, followed by a pause, and then the flash code is repeated. A lockout condition produces a red flash, followed by a pause, a solid red, a second pause, and then repeated. Table 53 lists the flash code information for Warning and Alert codes along with code reset and troubleshooting information.

LEDS

DIP SWITCHES

MODULE

POWER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T2 T1L3L2L1

MOTOR THERMAL SENSORS

JUMPER

COMMUNICATION PORT

CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS

COMPRESSOR PHASE SENSING

A38-7314

Warning Codes (Green LED Flash Code):

• Code 1 – Loss of Communication: The module will flash

the green Warning LED one time indicating the module

has not communicated with the master controller for lon-

ger than 5 minutes. Once communication is reinitiated,

the Warning will be cleared. The 30MP units do not sup-

port the communication capability of this module.

• Code 2 – Reserved For Future Use

• Code 3 – Short Cycling: The module will flash the green

Warning LED three times indicating the compressor has

short cycled more than 48 times in 24 hours. A short

cycle is defined as compressor runtime of less than 1

minute. The Warning will be activated when the “Short

Cycling” DIP Switch (no. 10) is OFF (in the down posi-

tion). When fewer than 48 short cycles are accumulated

in 24 hours the Warning code will be cleared.

• Code 4 – Open/Shorted Scroll Thermistor: The module

will flash the green Warning LED four times, indicating

that the scroll NTC thermistor has a resistance value that

indicates an open/shorted thermistor. The Warning will

be cleared when the resistance value is in the normal

range. The 30MP units do not utilize a scroll thermistor.

• Code 5 – Not used. Alert/Lockout Codes (Red LED Flash Code):

• Code 1 – Motor High Temperature: The module will

flash the red Alert LED one time indicating the motor

PTC circuit has exceeded 4500 .. A Code 1 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 30 minutes and the M2-M1 contacts will close if the resistance of the motor PTC circuit is below 2750 .. Five consecutive Code 1 Alerts will lock out the compressor. Once the module has locked out the compressor, a power cycle will be required for the lockout to be cleared.

• Code 2 – Open/Shorted Motor Thermistor: The module will flash the red Alert LED 2 times indicating the motor PTC thermistor circuit has a resistance value greater than 220  or less than 100 . that indicates an open/shorted thermistor chain. A Code 2 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 30 minutes and the M2-M1 contacts will close if the resistance of the motor PTC circuit is back in the normal range. The module will lock out the compressor if the trip condition exists for longer than 6 hours. Once the module has locked out the compressor, a power cycle will be required to clear the lockout.

• Code 3 – Short Cycling: The module will flash the red Alert LED 3 times indicating the compressor is locked out due to short cycling. A Code 3 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. Code 3 will be enabled when the Short Cycling DIP switch (no. 10) is ON (in the up position) and the compressor has exceeded the number of short cycles configured by the user in a 24-hour period. Once the module has locked

out the compressor, a power cycle

will be required to clear the lockout.

• Code 4 – Scroll High Temperature: The module will flash the red Alert LED 4 times indicating the scroll NTC circuit is less than 2400 .. A Code 4 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 30 minutes and the M2-M1 contacts will close if the resistance of the scroll NTC circuit is higher than 5100 .. The module will lock out the compressor if the number of Code 4 Alerts exceeds the user configurable number of Code 4 events within a 24-hour period. Once the module has locked out the compressor, a power cycle will be required to clear the lockout.

• Code 5 – Not used.

• Code 6 – Missing Phase: The module will flash the red Alert LED 6 times indicating a missing phase in one of the three leads to the compressor. A Code 6 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 5 minutes and the M2-M1 contacts will close if the missing phase condition is not present. The module will lock out the compressor after 10 consecutive Code 6 Alerts. Once the module has locked out the compressor, a power cycle will be required to clear the lockout.

• Code 7 – Reverse Phase: The module will flash the red Alert LED 7 times indicating a reverse phase in two of the three leads to the compressor. A Code 7 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The module will lock out the compressor after one Code 7 Alert. A power cycle will be required to clear the lockout.

• Code 8 – Not used.

• Code 9 – Module Low Voltage: The module will flash the red Alert LED 9 times indicating low module voltage, less than 18 vac on the T2-T1 terminals for more than 5 seconds. A Code 9 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 5 minutes and the M2M1 contacts will close if the T2-T1 voltage is above the reset value in 18 to 30 vac.

Resetting Alert codes can be accomplished manually by cy-

cling power to the module (disconnect T2 or T1 for 5 seconds). If the fault that initiated the Alert code is absent after the reset is performed, the Alert code will be cleared and CoreSense module will allow normal operation. If the fault is still present after the reset is performed, the fault code will continue to be displayed via the green or red flashing LED.

Table 52 —CoreSense Communication Module DIP Switch Settings

COPELAND

ELECTRICAL

CODE

“TE” ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

“TW”* ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

*Settings for Kriwan retrofit. See “CoreSense Replacement of Kriwan Motor Protection Module” on page 55.

12345678910

DIP SWITCH

Table 53 — CoreSense Communication Module LED Flash Codes

LED STATUS FAULT CONDITION

SOLID GREEN

SOLID RED

GREEN FLASH CODE 1

GREEN FLASH CODE 2 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

GREEN FLASH CODE 3

GREEN FLASH CODE 4 GREEN FLASH CODE 5 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

RED FLASH CODE 1

RED FLASH CODE 2

RED FLASH CODE 3

RED FLASH CODE 4 Scroll high temperature Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable RED FLASH CODE 5 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

RED FLASH CODE 6

RED FLASH CODE 7

RED FLASH CODE 8 Not used Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

RED FLASH CODE 9

None, normal operation Module is powered and

Module malfunction Module has an internal fault Not applicable 1. Reset module by removing

Loss of communication Module and Master Control-

Short cycling Run time of less than 1 min-

Open/Shorted Scroll Thermistor

High motor temperature Thermistor resistance

Open/shorted motor thermistor

Short cycling Run time of less than 1 min-

Missing phase Missing phase detected.

Reverse phase Reverse phase detected.

Module low voltage Less than 18 vac supplied

FAULT CODE

DESCRIPTION

under normal operation

WARNING LED FLASH

ler have lost communications with each other for more than 5 minutes

ute. Number of short cycles exceeds 48 in a 24-hour period.

Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

ALERT/LOCKOUT LED FLASH

greater than 4500 . Lockout occurs after 5 alerts.

Thermistor resistance greater than 4500 , or less than 100 . Lockout occurs after 6 hours.

ute. Lockout if the number of alerts exceeds the number configured by the user in 24 hours.

Lockout after 10 consecutive alerts.

Lockout after 1 alert.

to module

FAULT CODE RESET

Not applicable None

Automatic when communications are re-established

Fewer than 48 short cycles in 24 hours

Thermistor resistance less than 2750  and 30 minutes have elapsed

Thermistor resistance is between 100 and 2750  and 30 minutes have elapsed

Interrupt power to T2-T1 30MP controls do not allow

After 5 minutes and missing phase con ent

Interrupt power to T2-T1 1. Check incoming power

After 5 minutes and voltage is between 18 and 30 vac

dition is not pres-

TROUBLESHOOTING

INFORMATION

power from T1-T2.

2. Replace module.

Not Supported. Check DIP Switch settings.

30MP controls do not allow this operation normally. Confirm proper wiring and DIP switch settings.

1. Check power supply.

2. Check system charge and superheat.

3. Check compressor contactor.

1. Check for poor connec-

tions at module and thermistor fusite.

2. Check continuity of therm-

istor wiring harness.

3. Check for an open thermistor circuit.

this operation normally. Confirm proper wiring.

1. Check incoming power.

2. Check fuses or circuit breakers.

3. Check compressor contactor.

phase sequence.

2. Check compressor contactor.

3. Check module phase wiring A-B-C.

This alert does not result in a lockout fault.

1. Verify correct 24 vac module is installed.

2. Check for a wiring error.

Troubleshooting procedures described for the Kriwan mod-

Fig. 42 — External Motor Protection Module,

30MP050-071 Units

ENTER

ule section (page 55) are applicable to the CoreSense communication module.

BITZER

PROTECTION MODULE — The 30MP unit sizes 050-071 use Bitzer compressors, which are equipped with 24V Lodam motor protection modules. See Fig. 42. The module opens the relay contact in the control circuit and locks out immediately if the motor temperature exceeds the preset limit. If a lockout occurs the compressor must cool to ambient temperature and the unit alarm must be cleared manually before the compressor will restart.

CAUTION

Do not apply external voltage to orange instrument leads, even for test purposes. Damage to the Lodam protection device may result.

FIELD TROUBLESHOOTING SOLID-STATE MOTOR PROTECTION MODULE — Follow the steps listed below to troubleshoot the module in the field. See wiring diagram in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4 or in terminal box cover.

1. De-energize control circuit and module power. Remove the control circuit wires from the module (Terminals M1 and M2 or L and N). Connect a jumper across these “control circuit” wires. This will bypass the “control contact” of the module.

Re-energize the control circuit and module power. If the compressor will not operate with the jumper installed, then the problem is external to the solid-state protection system.

If the compressor operates with the module bypassed but will not operate when the module is reconnected, then the control circuit relay in the module is open. The thermistor protection chain now needs to be tested to determine if the module’s control circuit relay is open due to excessive internal temperatures or a faulty component.

CAUTION

2. Check the thermistor protection chain located in the compressor as follows:

a. De-energize control circuit and module power. b. Remove the sensor leads from the module (S1 and

S2 or 11 and 14). Measure the resistance of the thermistor protection chain through these sensor leads with an ohmmeter.

IMPORTANT: Use an ohmmeter with a maximum of 9 volts to check the sensor chain. The sensor chain is sensitive and easily damaged; no attempt should be made to check continuity through it with anything other than an ohmmeter. The application of any external voltage to the sensor chain may cause damage requiring the replacement of the compressor.

The diagnosis of this resistance reading is as follows:

• 200 to 2250 ohms - Normal operating range

• 2750 ohms or greater - Compressor overheated - Allow

time to cool

• Zero resistance - Shorted sensor circuit - Replace the

compressor

• Infinite resistance - Open sensor circuit - Replace the

compressor

Motor Protector PTC Key Values Normal PTC resistance: 250 to 2250 Ohms Trip resistance: >4500 Ohm ± 20% Reset resistance: <2750 Ohm ± 20%

If the resistance reading is abnormal, remove the sensor connector plug from the compressor and measure the resistance at the sensor fusite pins. This will determine if the abnormal reading was due to a faulty connector. On initial start-up, and after any module trip, the resistance of the sensor chain must be below the module reset point before the module circuit will close. Reset values are 2250 to 3000 ohms.

3. If the sensor chain has a resistance that is below 2250 ohms, and the compressor will run with the control circuit bypassed, but will not run when connected properly, the solid-state module is defective and should be replaced. The replacement module must have the same supply voltage rating as the original module.

Alarms and Alerts — These are warnings of abnormal

or fault conditions, and may cause either one circuit or the whole unit to shut down. They are assigned code numbers as described in Table 54.

Automatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if the condition corrects itself. The following method must be used to reset manual alarms:

Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the alarm and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the LED on the side of the scrolling marquee display. Press

and until the sub-menu item RCRN “RESET ALL CURRENT ALARMS” is displayed. Press . The control will prompt the user for a password, by displaying PASS and WORD. Press to display the default password, 1111. Press for each character. If the password has been changed, use the arrow keys to change each individual character. Toggle the display to “YES” and press . The alarms will be reset.

The motor protection system within the compressor is now bypassed. Use this configuration to temporarily test module only. Failure to do this may result in unit damage.

* Bitzer is a registered trademark of Bitzer Kuhlmaschinenbrau GmbH.

Table 54 — Alarm and Alert Codes

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

See legend on page 63.

ALARM

ALERT

A048 Alarm

T051 Alert

A051 Alarm

T052 Alert

A052 Alarm

T053 Alert

A053 Alarm

A060 Alarm

A061 Alarm

T062 Alert Condenser Leaving Fluid

T063 Alert Condenser Entering Fluid

T068 None

T073 Alert

T074 Alert

A077 Alarm

T079 Alert

A090 Alarm

A092 Alarm

T094 Alert

A110 Alarm Circuit A Loss of Charge

A112 Alarm

A114 Alarm

DESCRIPTION

Circuit A Compressor Availability Alarm

Circuit A, Compressor 1 Failure

Circuit A, Compressor 1 Stuck on Failure

Circuit A, Compressor 2 Failure

Circuit A, Compressor 2 Stuck on Failure

Circuit A, Compressor 3 Failure

Circuit A, Compressor 3 Stuck on Failure

Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure

Cooler Entering Fluid Thermistor Failure

Thermistor Failure

Circuit A Return Gas Thermistor Failure

Outside Air Thermistor Failure

Space Temperature/Dual Chiller Thermistor Failure

Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature exceeds Cooler Leaving Fluid Temperature

Lead/Lag LWT Thermistor Failure

Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure

Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure

Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure

Circuit A High Saturated Suction Temperature

Circuit A Low Suction Superheat

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

Two compressors on circuit failed

Compressor feedback signal does not match relay state

Respective current sensor board (CSB) feedback signal is ON when the compressor should be off

Compressor feedback signal does not match relay state

Respective current sensor board (CSB) feedback signal is ON when the compressor should be off

Compressor feedback signal does not match relay state

Respective current sensor board (CSB) feedback signal is ON when the compressor

uld be off

sho Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) If return gas sensors are

enabled (RG.EN) and thermistor is outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) (if enabled)

Faulty expansion valve, suction pressure transducer or leaving fluid thermistor.

Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Outside of range (0 to 667 psig)

Outside of range (0 to 420 psig)

Discharge thermistor (DTT) is either open or shorted outside of range –39.9 to 356 F (–39.9 to 180 C)

If the compressors are off and discharge pressure reading is < 26 psig for 30 sec.

Circuit saturated suction temperature pressure transducer > 70 F (21.1 C) for 5 minutes

Suction superheat is less than 5° F (2.8 C) for 5 minutes. (if RGT installed)

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Circuit shut down Manual

Compressor A1 shut down.

All compressor outputs de-energized. 30MPA head pressure routine remains active.

Compressor A2 shut down.

All compressor outputs de-energized. 30MPA head pressure routine remains active.

Compressor A3 shut down.

All compressor outputs de-energized. 30MPA head pressure routine remains active.

Chiller shut down immediately

Alert only. No action taken.

Circuit A shut down Automatic

Temperature reset disabled. Chiller runs under normal control/set points.

Circuit A shut down. Manual

iller runs as a stand

Ch alone machine

Circuit A shut down Automatic

Digital compressor shut down.

Circuit not allowed to start.

Circuit shut down Manual

Circuit A shut down.

RESET

METHOD

Manual

Automatic

Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged

Automatic

Manual

Automatic restart

after first daily

occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

PROBABLE

CAUSE

See applicable compressor alarm.

High-pressure switch open, faulty CSB, loss of condenser flow, filter drier plugged, noncondensables, operation beyond capability, motor protection module open.

Welded contactor, welded control relay on MBB, wiring error, faulty CSB.

High-pressure switch open, faulty CSB, loss of condenser flow, filter drier plugged, noncondensables, operation beyond capability, motor protection module open.

Welded contactor, welded control relay on MBB, wiring error, faulty CSB.

High-pressure switch open, faulty CSB, loss of condenser flow, filter drier plugged, noncondensables, operation beyond capability, motor protection module open.

Welded contactor, welded control relay on MBB, wiring error, faulty CSB.

Thermistor failure, damaged cable/wire or wiring error.

cable/wire or wiring error.

Thermistor failure, damaged cable/wire or wiring error.

Faulty expansion valve suction pressure transducer or leaving fluid thermistor.

Dual LWT thermistor failure, damaged cable/wire or wiring error.

Transducer failure, poor connection to MBB, or wiring damage/error.

Thermistor failure, damaged cable/wire or wiring error.

Refrigerant leak or transducer failure

Faulty expansion valve, faulty suction pressure transducer or high entering fluid temperature.

Faulty expansion valve, faulty suction pressure transducer, faulty suction gas thermistor, circuit overcharged

Table 54 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

A116 Alarm

P118 Pre-Alert

T118 Alert

A122 Alarm

A126 Alarm

A133 Alarm

A140 Alert

A150 Alarm Emergency Stop

A151 Alarm Illegal Configuration

A152 Alarm

T153 Alert

A154 Alarm

T155 Alert

A156 Alarm

A157 Alarm A/D Hardware Failure

A172 Alarm

T173 Alert

T174 Alert

A175 Alarm

T176 Alert

See legend on page 63.

ALARM

ALERT

DESCRIPTION

Circuit A Low Cooler Suction Temperature

High Discharge Gas Temperature

High Pressure Switch Trip Circuit A

Circuit A High Head Pressure

Circuit A Low Suction Pressure

Reverse Rotation Detected

Unit Down Due to Failure

Real Time Clock Hardware Failure

Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure

Serial EEPROM Storage Failure

Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure

Loss of Communication with EXV Board

Loss of Communication with EMM

4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Input Failure

Loss of Communication with AUX Board

4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset Input Failure

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

Mode 7 caused the compressor to unload 3 consecutive times with less than a 30-minute interval between each circuit shutdown.

Digital compressor enabled (A1.TY) and discharge gas temperature greater than 268 F (131.1 C)

High Pressure A Switch Input open to MBB

SCT >Maximum condensing temperature from operating envelope Operation outside compressor operating envelope

Suction pressure below 34 psig for 8 seconds or below 23 psig

Incoming chiller power leads not phased correctly

CCN emergency stop command received

One or more illegal configurations exists.

Both circuits are down due to alarms/alerts.

Internal clock on MBB fails

Hardware failure with MBB

Configuration/storage failure with MBB

Hardware failure with peripheral device

MBB loses communication with EXV board

MBB loses communication with EMM

If configured with EMM and input less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA

MBB losses communication with AUX board

If configured with EMM and input less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Circuit shut down Manual

This is a non-broadcast alarm. Compressor A1 is shut down.

Compressor A1 is shut down.

Circuit shut down Manual

Circuit shut down

Chiller not allowed to start.

Chiller shut down.

Chiller is not allowed to start.

Chiller is unable to run.

Occupancy schedule will not be used. Chiller defaults to Local On mode.

Chiller is unable to run.

No Action Manual

Chiller is not allowed to run.

r is not allowed

Chille to run.

Chiller is not allowed to run.

4 to 20 mA temperature reset disabled. Demand Limit set to 100%. 4 to 20 mA set point disabled.

Set point function disabled. Chiller controls to CSP1.

Digital control is disabled. Automatic

Reset function disabled. Chiller returns to normal set point control.

RESET

METHOD

Automatic, when discharge temperature is less than 250 F (121.1 C).

Manual

Automatic, only after first 3 daily occurrences. Manual reset thereafter. SCT must drop 5 F (2.8 C) before restart

Automatic restart after first daily occurrence. Manual restart

ereafter.

Manual

Automatic once CCN command for EMSTOP returns to normal

Manual once configuration errors are corrected

Automatic once alarms/alerts are cleared that prevent the chiller from starting.

Automatic when correct clock control restarts.

Manual

Automatic

PROBABLE

CAUSE

Faulty expansion valve, low refrigerant charge, plugged filter drier, faulty suction pressure transducer, low cooler fluid flow

Circuit overcharged, faulty discharge temperature thermistor

Faulty transducer/high pressure switch.

Plugged filter drier unit operating outside of range. Faulty transducer/high pressure switch overcharged, low/ restricted condenser airflow (30MPA) low or loss of condenser flow (30MPW), fouled condenser (30MPW), faulty EXV.

Faulty or plugged TXV or EXV, low refrigerant charge, TXV out of adjustment, liquid line valve partially closed. Plugged filter drier. Low cooler flow.

Reverse any two incoming power leads to correct. Check for correct fan rotation first.

CCN Network command.

Configuration error. Check unit settings.

Alarm notifies user that chiller is 100% down.

Time/Date/Month/ Day/Year not properly set.

Main Base Board failure.

Potential failure of MBB. Download current operating software. Replace MBB if error occurs again.

Main Base Board failure.

Wiring error, faulty wiring or failed EXV board.

Wiring error, faulty wiring or failed Energy Management Module (EMM).

Faulty signal generator, wiring error, or faulty EMM.

Wiring error, faulty wiring, failed AUX board, ditital option enabled, Configuration→Unit→AI.TY=YES

Faulty signal generator, wiring error, or faulty EMM.

Table 54 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

T177 Alert

P200 Pre-Alert

T200 Alert

P201 Pre-Alert

A201 Alarm

A202 Alarm

T203 Alert

T204 Alert

T205 Alert

T206 Alert

A207 Alarm

A208 Alarm

A220

P221 Pre-Alert Condenser Pump

See legend on page 63.

ALARM

ALERT

Alarm Condenser Pump

DESCRIPTION

4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure

Coder Flow/Interlock Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up

Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts failed to Close at start-up

Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation

Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off

Loss of Communication with slave chiller

Loss of Communication with master chiller

Master and slave chiller with same address

High Leaving Chilled Water Temperature

Cooler Freeze Protection

EWT or LWT Thermistor failure

terlock Failure to

In Close at Start-Up

Interlock Opened During Normal Operation

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

If configured with EMM and input less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA

Cooler flow switch contacts failed to close within 1 minute (if cooler pump control is enabled) or within 5 minutes (if cooler pump control is not enabled) after start-up

Flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds after being initially closed

If configured for cooler pump control and flow switch input is closed for 5 minutes while pump output(s) are off

Master chiller MBB loses communication with slave chiller MBB

Slave chiller MBB loses communication with master chiller MBB

Master and slave chiller have the same CCN address (CCN.A)

LWT read is greater than LCW Alert Limit, Total capacity is 100% and LWT is greater than LWT reading one minute ago

Cooler EWT or LWT is less than Brine Freeze (BR.FZ)

Cooler EWT is less than LWT by 3° F (1.7° C) for 1 minute after a circuit is started

If configured for condenser pump interlock and the flow switch input fails to close within 5 minutes after startup. Also valid when configured for condenser pump control.

If configured for condenser pump interlock and the flow switch opens for 15 seconds during normal operation (or when the condenser pump relay is on when condenser pump control is configured.)

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Demand limit function disabled. Chiller returns to 100% demand limit control.

Chiller not allowed to start.

All compressors shut down.

Chiller not allowed to

art

Dual chiller control disabled. Chiller runs as a stand-alone machine.

Dual chiller control disabled. Chiller runs as a stand-alone machine

Dual chiller routine disabled. Master/slave run as stand-alone chillers.

Alert only. No action taken.

Chiller shut down without going through pumpdown. Cooler pump continues to run a minimum of 5 minutes (if control enabled).

Chiller shut down. Cooler pump shut off (if control enabled).

Condenser and cooler pumps shut off. Chiller shut down

RESET

METHOD

Automatic

Manual

Automatic when aux contacts open

Automatic

Both EWT and LWT must be at least 6 F (3.3 C) above Brine Freeze point (BR.FZ). Automatic for first, Manual reset there after.

Manual

Manual Failure of condenser

Faulty signal generator, wiring error, or faulty EMM.

No chilled water flow. Faulty flow switch or interlock. Wiring error.

Cooler pump failure, faulty flow switch or interlock. Wiring error.

Wiring error, faulty pump contactor (welded contacts)

Wiring error, faulty wiring, failed Slave chiller MBB module, power loss at slave chiller, wrong slave address.

Wiring error, faulty wiring, failed master chiller MBB module, power loss at Master chiller.

CCN Address for both chillers is the same. Must be different. Check CCN.A under the OPT2 sub-mode in Configuration at both chillers.

Building load greater than unit capacity, low water/brine flow or compressor fault. Check for other alarms/alerts.

Faulty thermistor (T1/T2), low water flow.

Reverse flow faulty thermistor, miswired thermistor

pump or controls. Wiring error.

PROBABLE

CAUSE

Table 54 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

A221 Alarm Condenser Pump

A222 Alarm Condenser Pump

T302 Alert

T500 Alert

T501 Alert

T502 Alert

T950 Alert Loss of Communication

A951

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network CSB — Current Sensor Board CSM — Chiller System Manager EEPROM — Electronic Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory EMM — Energy Management Module EWT — Entering Fluid Temperature EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve LCW — Leaving Chilled Water LWT — Leaving Fluid Temperature MBB — Main Base Board RGT — Return Gas Temperature SCT — Saturated Condenser Temperature TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve WSM — Water System Manager

ALARM

ALERT

Alarm Loss of Communication

LEGEND

DESCRIPTION

Interlock Opened During Normal Operation

Interlock Closed When Pump is Off

Strainer Blowdown Scheduled Maintenance Due

Current Sensor Board A1 Failure

Current Sensor Board A2 Failure

Current Sensor Board A3 Failure

with Water System Manager

illervisor System

with Ch Manager

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

If configured for condenser pump interlock and the flow switch opens for 15 seconds during normal operation (or when the condenser pump relay is on when condenser pump control is configured.)

If configured for condenser pump interlock condenser pump control, and the flow switch is closed when pump relay is off.

Strainer Service Countdown (S.T.DN) expired. Complete strainer blowdown and enter 'YES' for Strainer Maintenance Done (S.T.MN) item.

Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value

No communications have been received by the MBB within 5 minutes of last transmission

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Condenser and cooler pumps shut off. Chiller shut down

Chiller is not allowed to start.

None Automatic

Compressor A1 shut down

Compressor A2 shut down

Compressor A3 shut down

WSM forces removed. Chiller runs under own control

CSM forces removed. Chiller runs under own control

RESET

METHOD

Manual Failure of condenser

Automatic

Automatic Failed module, wiring

PROBABLE

CAUSE

pump or controls. Wiring error.

pump relays or interlocks, welded contacts.

Routine strainer maintenance required

CSB failure.

error, failed transformer, loose connection plug, wrong address

COMPRESSOR FAILURE ALERTS A048 (Circuit A Compressor Availability Alarm)

— This alarm occurs when two compressors are unavailable to run on a 3-compressor circuit. The control ensures proper oil return by ensuring a circuit does not operate with one compressor for longer than one hour of cumulative run time.

T051, T052, T053 (Circuit A Compressor Failures)

— Alert codes 051, 052, and 053 are for compressors A1, A2, and A3 respectively. These alerts occur when the current sensor (CS) does not detect compressor current during compressor operation. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.

If the current sensor board reads OFF while the compressor

relay has been commanded ON, an alert is generated. POSSIBLE CAUSES Compressor Overload

— Either the compressor internal overload protector is open or the external overload protector (Kriwan, Copeland CoreSense, or Lodam module) has activated. The external overload protector modules are mounted in the compressor wiring junction box. Temperature sensors embedded in the compressor motor windings are the inputs to the module. The module is powered with 24 vac from the units main control box. The module output is a normally closed contact that is wired in series with the compressor contactor coil.

In a compressor motor overload condition, contact opens, de-energizing the compressor contactor.

Low Refrigerant Charge

— If the compressor operates for an extended period of time with low refrigerant charge, the compressor ASTP device will open, which will cause the compressor to trip on its overload protection device.

Circuit Breaker Trip

— The compressors are protected from

short circuit by a breaker in the control box. Wiring Error

— A wiring error might not allow the compres-

sor to start.

To check out alerts T051-T053:

1. Turn on the compressor in question using Service Test mode. If the compressor does not start, then most likely the problem is one of the following: HPS open, open internal protection, circuit breaker trip, incorrect safety wiring, incorrect compressor wiring or incorrect Copeland CoreSense internal phase monitor wiring.

2. If the compressor does start, verify it is rotating in the correct direction.

IMPORTANT: Prolonged operation in the wrong direction can damage the compressor. Correct rotation can be verified by a gage set and looking for a differential pressure rise on start-up.

IMPORTANT: If the CS is always detecting current, verify that the compressor is on. If the compressor is on, check the contactor and the relay on the MBB. If the compressor is off and there is no current, verify the CSB wiring and replace if necessary.

IMPORTANT: Return to Normal mode and observe compressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor is working.

COMPRESSOR STUCK ON FAILURE ALARMS Circuit A A051, A052, A053

— Alarm codes 051, 052, and 053 are for compressors A1, A2, and A3. These alarms occur when the CSB detects current when the compressor should be off. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.

If the current sensor board reads ON while the compressor relay has been commanded OFF for a period of 4 continuous seconds, an alarm is generated. These alarms are only monitored for a period of 10 seconds after the compressor relay has been commanded OFF. This is done to facilitate a service technician forcing a relay to test a compressor.

In addition, if a compressor stuck failure occurs and the current sensor board reports the compressor and the request off, certain diagnostics will take place as follows:

1. If any of the compressors are diagnosed as stuck on and the current sensor board is on and the request is off, the control will command the condenser fans to maintain normal head pressure.

2. The control will shut-off all other compressors. The possible causes include welded contactor or frozen

compressor relay on the MBB.

To check out alarms A051 to A053:

1. Place the unit in Service Test mode. All compressors should be off.

2. Verify that there is not 24-v at the contactor coil. If there is 24 v at the contactor, check relay on MBB and wiring.

3. Check for welded contactor.

4. Verify CSB wiring.

5. Return to Normal mode and observe compressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor is working and condenser fans are energized.

A060 (Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure)

— If the sensor reading is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C) then the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will shut down the entire unit.

A061 (Cooler Entering Thermistor Failure)

T062 (Condenser Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure)

— If the sensor reading is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C) then the alert will occur. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will send out an alert only.

T063 (Condenser Entering Thermistor Failure)

T068 (Circuit A Compressor Return Gas Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs if the RGT is configured and the compressor return gas temperature sensor is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this thermistor will shut down the appropriate circuit.

T073 (Outside Air Temperature Thermistor Failure)

— This alert occurs when the outside air temperature sensor is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this thermistor will disable any elements of the control which requires its use. The OAT must be configured.

T074 (Space Temperature Thermistor Failure)

— This alert occurs when the space temperature sensor is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this thermistor will disable any elements of the control which requires its use. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor in the T55 or T58 device, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. The SPT must be configured.

A077 (Circuit Saturated Suction Temperature Exceeds Cooler Leaving Water Temperature) — This alarm occurs when the saturated suction temperature (SST) is greater than leaving water for 5 minutes. This alarm will occur if either the suction pressure transducer reading, which is used to calculate SST, or cooler leaving water is incorrect. Potential causes for this alarm are loose wiring connection, sensor not located in well, or bad Schrader fitting. Reset is manual.

T079 (Dual Chiller Thermistor Failure)

— This alert occurs when the dual chiller temperature sensor is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this thermistor will disable dual chiller operation and return to stand-alone operation. The unit must be configured for dual chiller operation for this alert to occur. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Reset is automatic.

A090 (Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure)

— This alarm occurs when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0 to 667.0 psig (0.0 to 4599 kPag). A circuit cannot run when this alarm is active. Use the scrolling marquee to reset the alarm. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose connection.

A092 (Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure)

— This alarm occurs when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0 to 420.0 psig (0.0 to 2896 kPag). A circuit cannot run when this alarm is active. Use the scrolling marquee to reset the alarm. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose connection.

T094 (Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure)

— This alert occurs for units which have the digital compressor installed on circuit A. If discharge gas temperature is open or shorted, the circuit will be shut off. The valid range for this thermistor is –39.9 to 356 F (–39.9 to 180 C). The alert will reset itself when discharge temperature is less than 250 F (121.1 C). The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant charge or a faulty thermistor.

A110 (Circuit A Loss of Charge)

— This alarm occurs when the compressor is OFF and the discharge pressure is less than 26 psig (179.2 kPa).

A112 (Circuit A High Saturated Suction Temperature)

— Alarm code 112 occurs when compressors in a circuit have been running for at least 5 minutes and the circuit saturated suction temperature is greater than 70 F (21.1 C). The high saturated suction alarm is generated and the circuit is shut down.

A114 (Circuit A Low Superheat) when the superheat of a circuit is less than 5 F (2.8 C) for 5 continuous minutes. The low superheat alarm is generated and the circuit is shut down. The RGT sensor must be installed.

A116 (Circuit A Low Cooler Suction Temperature) Alarm code 116 occurs when mode 7 causes the compressor to unload 3 consecutive times in less than 30-minute intervals between each circuit shutdown. The low cooler suction temperature alarm is generated and the circuit is shut down. If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check for a faulty expansion valve.

• Check for a plugged filter drier.

• Check for a low refrigerant charge condition.

• Check the suction pressure transducer for accuracy.

• Check the cooler flow rate.

• Check the chilled water strainer for a restriction.

• Consider a fouled cooler.

• Check the glycol concentration in the loop; high glycol concentrations can cause the same effect as a fouled cooler.

• Check that the water flow is in the proper direction.

P118 — High Discharge Gas Temperature T118 — High Discharge Gas Temperature Criteria for Trip: This alert is part of the compressor protection

algorithm for digital compressor units. The following conditions must be true:

1. This alert will be triggered if the unit has a digital compressor and it is enabled (Configuration A1.TY=YES).

2. The discharge gas temperature (Temperatures CIR.AD.GAS) is greater than 268 F (131.1 C).

Action To Be Taken: Compressor A1 is shut down. If this is the first or second occurrence within a 32-minute window, the prealert P118 will be generated. This is a non-broadcast alert. If this is the third occurrence within the 32-minute window, the alert T118 is generated.

Reset Method: The first two times compressor A1 is shut down due to the pre-alert P118, the pre-alert will automatically reset after the discharge temperature is less than 250 F (121.1 C) and the compressor will restart. The third occurrence will result in the alert T118 and will require a manual reset.

Multiple P118 pre-alerts may be stored in the alarm history. If there are 1 or 2 strikes on the circuit and the circuit recovers for a period of time, it is possible to clear out the strikes, thereby resetting the strike counter automatically.

Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check to be sure that the circuit is properly charged. If a

leak is found, repair the leak and recharge the circuit.

• Check the discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) for

accuracy.

• Check the discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) con-

nections.

• Check unit configuration. A1.TY = NO if no digital com-

pressor is installed. A122 (Circuit A, High Pressure Switch Failure)

high-pressure switch is wired in series with the compressor contactor coils of each compressor on the circuit to disable compressor operation immediately upon a high discharge pressure condition.

For all 30MP015-045, 30MPA050-071, and 30MP050-071 high condensing units: The normally closed contacts in the switches are calibrated to open at 650 ± 10 psig (448.2 ± 68.9 kPag) which corresponds to a saturated condensing temperature of 155.6 ± 1.3 F (68.7 ± 0.7 C). The pressure switches will automatically reset when the discharge pressure is reduced to 500 ± 15 psig (3448 ± 103.4 kPag) which corresponds to a saturated condensing temperature of 134.1 ± 2.4 F (56.7 ± 1.3 C).

— Alarm code 114 occurs

—



UNIT



— The

For all 30MPW050-071 standard units: The normally closed contacts in the switches are calibrated to open at 558 ± 10 psig (3847 ± 68.9 kPag) which corresponds to a saturated condensing temperature of 140.3 ± 2.3 F (60.16 ± 16.5 C). The pressure switches will automatically reset when the discharge pressure is reduced to 435 ± 29 psig (2999 ± 199.9 kPag) which corresponds to a saturated condensing temperature of

120.35 ± 5.3 F (49.08 ± 14.83 C).

The output of the high-pressure switch is wired to inputs on the MBB to provide the control with an indication of a high pressure switch trip. This alert could occur when compressors are off if the wiring to the switch is broken or the switch has failed open.

When the trip occurs, all mechanical cooling on the circuit is shut down for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, the circuit is allowed to restart.

A126 (Circuit A High Head Pressure) when the appropriate saturated condensing temperature is greater than the operating envelope shown in Fig 43-45. Prior to the alarm, the control will shut down one compressor on a circuit if that circuit’s saturated condensing temperature is greater than the maximum SCT minus 5° F (2.7° C). If SCT continues to rise to greater than the maximum SCT, the alarm will occur and the circuit’s remaining compressor will shut down. The cause of the alarm is usually an overcharged system, high outdoor ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil (30MPA only), plugged filter drier, a faulty high-pressure switch, faulty expansion valve, or loss of condenser water flow. Figures 43-45 shows the operating envelope for the compressor.

This alarm is also generated when the saturated suction temperature is below the low limit for compressors (outside of compressor envelope).

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check to be sure that the circuit is properly charged. If a

leak is found, repair the leak and recharge the circuit.

• Check for proper water flow for the cooler.

• For 30MPA units, if the alarms are occurring during cold

ambient conditions, consider installing head pressure

control on remote condenser.

• If wind baffles are required, check to see if they are

installed.

• Check the suction pressure transducer accuracy.

• Check for a low load condition. Check the control sys-

tem to see if the unit should be operating.

• Check for restrictions in the liquid line. Be sure all ser-

vice valves are open.

• Check the filter drier. Change the core(s) if necessary.

• Check glycol concentration and make sure brine freeze

(Set Points

centration.

• Check the operation of the liquid line solenoid valves, if

equipped. Be sure that the correct valve operates for the

circuit.

• Be sure that the liquid line solenoid valve is installed cor-

rectly (flow), if equipped.

• For the circuit TXV(s):

- Check the superheat setting of the TXV. A very high setting will cause low saturated suction condition.

- Check to be sure the proper TXV is installed.

- Check the operation of the TXV.

- Check the location of the TXV bulb and that it is properly installed on the suction line.

- Check the TXV equalizer line to be sure that it is properly connected to the suction line and open to suction pressure.



FRZBR.FZ) is properly set for the con-

— This alarm occurs

170

140

150

160

110

120

130

100

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 304050607080

SCT (F)

SST (F)

LEGEND

Fig. 43 — Operating Envelope for R-410A Compressor, 30MP015-045 Units

SCT —

Saturated Condensing Temperature

SST —

Saturated Suction Temperature

a30-4969

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

SCT (F)

SST (F)

a30-5978

LEGEND

SCT —

Saturated Condensing Temperature

SST —

Saturated Suction Temperature

Fig. 44 — Operating Envelope for R410-A Compressor, 30MPA,MPW050-071 High Condensing Units

The example below lists sample suction pressures of a starting

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

SCT (F)

SST (F)

a30-5979

LEGEND

SCT —

Saturated Condensing Temperature

SST —

Saturated Suction Temperature

Fig. 45 — Operating Envelope for R410-A Compressor, 30MPW050-071 Units

A133 (Circuit A Low Suction Pressure)

— This alarm indi-

cates that after the compressor has been running for 1 minute

circuit. Figures 46 and 47 show reverse rotation detection for this example.

one of the following has occurred: suction pressure is below 34 psig (234 kPa), saturated suction temperature is less than 12 F (–24.4 C) for 8 seconds, the suction pressure falls below

TIME

23 psig (158 kPa), or saturated temperature is less than –18 F (–27.8 C). The Circuit A low suction pressure alert occurs and the circuit is shut down. The reset function will occur automatically for the first daily occurrence and manually (MBB) for each reoccurrence.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check the unit refrigeration charge, a low charge condition can cause low suction pressures.

• Check the TXV operation.

• Check the liquid line service valve to be sure that it is fully open.

• Check the liquid line filter drier for a restriction.

• Check the head pressure control device. For 30MPA units, check the remote condenser to be sure that it is operating correctly. If the remote condenser does not have head pressure control, consider adding it. For 30MPW units, check the condenser water regulating valve for proper operation. If the unit does not have head pressure control, consider adding one, or adjusting the loop temperature.

A140 — Reverse Rotation Detected Criteria for Trip: The alarm criterion is checked when the first

compressor in a circuit is started. The control writes the value of the suction pressure 5 seconds before starting the first compressor in the circuit. At the time the compressor is started, another reading is obtained. A rate of change is calculated based on the two values and extrapolated to the expected value 5 seconds later. The suction pressure is obtained 5 seconds after the compressor has been started. If the suction pressure is not at least 1.25 psig (8.62 kPa) lower than the expected value or the upper limit for proof of proper rotation, a reverse rotation alarm is declared.

t=–5 (5 seconds before compressor start)

t=0 (compressor start) 197.1 (1359) 69 (20.6) t=5 (5 seconds after

compressor start)

Using the rate of change of the suction from the example, five (5) seconds after t=0, the suction pressure should be 193.8 psig (1336 kPa), if the compressor did not start. Subtracting the 1.25 psig (8.62 kPa) from extrapolated suction pressure,

192.55 psig (1328 kPa) determines the upper limit that if the suction pressure is above this level the unit will fault on reverse rotation. This point is denoted by a black dot in Fig. 46 and 47. In the example, the suction pressure is lower than the upper limit, and therefore is allowed to continue operation.

Action To Be Taken: The unit shuts down immediately. Reset Method: Manual. Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the wiring of the incoming power for proper phas-

ing. This alarm may be disabled once the reverse rota-

tion check has been verified by setting Reverse Rotation

Enable Configuration

• Check for an inoperative compressor

SUCTION

PRESSURE

psig (kPa)

200.4 (1382) 70 (21.1)

169.6 (1169) 60 (15.6)



SERVREV.R=DSBL.

SATURATED

SUCTION

TEMPERATURE

°F (°C)

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5

Time (sec)

205

200

195

190

185

180

175

170

165

Suction Pressure (psig)

Suction Pressure (psig) Extrapolated Suction Pressure (psig) Upper Limit for Proof of Proper Rotation (psig)

LEGEND

Fig. 46 — Reverse Rotation Detection (psig)

Time (sec)

Suction Pressure (psig)

Suction Pressure (psig) Extrapolated Suction Pressure (psig) Upper Limit for Proof of Proper Rotation (psig)

LEGEND

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1400

1350

1300

1250

1200

1150

Fig. 47 — Reverse Rotation Detection (kPa)

A150 (Unit is in Emergency Stop) stop command is received, the alarm is generated and the unit will be immediately stopped.

— If the CCN emergency

If the CCN point name EMSTOP in the system table is set to emergency stop, the unit will shut down immediately and broadcast an alarm back to the CCN, indicating that the unit is down. This alarm will clear when the variable is set back to “enable.”

A151 — Illegal Configuration Alarm Criteria for Trip: This alarm is indicated when an illegal con-

figuration has been entered. There are several different configuration alarms. When expanding the alarm, the control will indicate which configuration is incorrect. For example, if the wrong size is configured, the A151 expansion will indicate “ILLEGAL CONFIG - INVALID UNIT SIZE.”

Action To Be Taken: The unit is not allowed to start. Reset Method: Automatic, once the illegal configuration is cor-

rected.

• Possible Causes: If this condition is encountered, check the items shown in Table 55 based on the illegal configuration.

A152 (Unit Down Due to Failure)

— Reset is automatic when all alarms are cleared. This alarm indicates the unit is at 0% capacity.

T153 (Real Time Clock Hardware Failure)

— A problem has been detected with MBB real time clock hardware. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alert continues, the board should be replaced.

A154 (Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure)

— A problem has been detected with the EEPROM on the MBB. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm continues, the board should be replaced.

T155 (Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error)

— A problem has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the MBB. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alert continues, the board should be replaced.

A156 (Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) problem has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the MBB. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm continues, the board should be replaced.

A157 (A/D Hardware Failure)

— A problem has been detected with A/D conversion on the boards. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm continues, the board should be replaced.

A172 (Loss of Communication with the EXV Board) This alarm indicates that there are communication problems with the EXV board. The alarm will automatically reset.

T173 (Energy Management Module Communication Failure) — This alert indicates that there are communication problems with the energy management module. All functions performed by the EMM will stop, which can include demand limit, reset and capacity input. The alert will automatically reset.

T174 (4 to 20 mA Cooling Set point Input Failure) alert indicates a problem has been detected with cooling set point 4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA.

A175 (Loss of Communication with the AUX Board) This alarm will be generated when the Main Base Board (MBB) loses communication with the AUX Board. The digital control option will be disabled while this alert is active. The chiller continues to run without Digital Compressor Control. The alert will reset automatically if communication is re-established or the unit configuration for digital control, A1.TY Compressor A1 Digital?

(Configuration Mode→UNIT) = NO.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check for a wiring error.

• Check for a faulty communication bus, or no connection

to the AUX Board.

• Check the AUX Board.

• If the unit is configured for digital control, A1.TY Com-

pressor A1 Digital?

(Configuration Mode→UNIT) is

YES, but the unit is not a Digital Capacity machine, (no digital compressor or AUX Board), this alarm will be generated.

T176 (4 to 20 mA Reset Input Failure)

— This alert indi-

cates a problem has been detected with reset 4 to 20 mA input.

— A

—

— This

—

The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA. The reset function will be disabled when this occurs.

T177 (4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure)

— This alert indicates a problem has been detected with demand limit 4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA. The reset function will be disabled when this occurs.

P200 (Coder Flow/Interlock Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Pre-Alarm)

T200 (Cooler Flow Interlock Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert) — If Cooler Pump Control is enabled, (Con- figuration→OPT1→CPC=ON) and the Cooler Flow Switch/ Cooler Pump Interlock Contacts failed to close within 1 minute of a start command, a P200 alarm will be declared. This is a non-broadcasting alarm. The control will wait for flow to be established before starting any compressors. If after 5 minutes, the Cooler Flow Switch/Cooler Pump Interlock Contacts have not closed, the T200 alarm is declared.

Cooler Pump Interlock Contacts failed to close within 1 minute of a start command, a P200 alarm will be declared. This is a non-broadcasting alarm. The control will wait for flow to be established before starting any compressors. If after 5 minutes, the Cooler Flow Switch/Cooler Pump Interlock Contacts have not closed, the T200 alarm is declared.

If Cooler Pump Control is not enabled, (Configura-

tion

→OPT1→CPC=OFF) and the Cooler Flow Switch/Cooler

Pump Interlock Contacts failed to close within 5 minutes of a start command, a T200 alarm will be declared.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check the chilled water flow switch for proper operation.

• Check the flow switch cable for power and control.

• Check the chilled water loop to be sure that it is com-

pletely filled with water, and all air has been purged.

• Check the chilled water pump interlock circuit for proper

operation.

• Check the pump electrical circuit for power.

• Check the pump circuit breaker.

• Check the pump contactor for proper operation.

• Check the chilled water pump for proper operation.

Look for overload trips.

• Check the chilled water strainer for a restriction.

• Check to be sure that all isolation valves are open

completely.

P201 (Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Pre-alarm)

A201 (Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm) — This alarm will be generated if the chilled water flow switch opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially being closed, and a P201 - Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and the machine will stop. If flow is proven, the machine will be allowed to restart. If after 5 minutes, the cooler flow switch/interlock contacts do not close, the alarm will change to a A201 - Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm. When this alarm is generated the chiller is shut down.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check the chilled water flow switch for proper operation.

• Check the flow switch cable for power and control.

• Check the chilled water loop to be sure that it is completely filled with water, and all air has been purged.

• Check the chilled water pump interlock circuit for proper operation.

• Check the pump electrical circuit for power.

• Check the pump circuit breaker.

• Check the pump contactor for proper operation.

• Check the chilled water pump for proper operation. Look for overload trips.

• Check the chilled water strainer for a restriction.

• Check to be sure that all isolation valves are open completely.

A202 (Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump Is Off Alarm) — This alarm will be generated if the unit is configured for CPC=ON Cooler Pump Control, (Configura-

tion

→OPT1) without a call for the Chilled Water Pump,

C.LWP=OFF (Outputs→GEN.O) and the chilled water switch is closed, FLOW=ON Cooler Flow Switch (Inputs

→GEN.I)

for 5 minutes. When this alarm is generated the chiller is not allowed to start.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check for a wiring error for the chilled water flow switch, the chilled water flow switch’s connection to the MBB, or a wiring error to the chilled water pump.

• Check to see if the chilled water pump control has been manually bypassed.

• Check for a faulty or grounded chilled water flow switch.

• Check chilled water pump contactor for welded contacts.

Table 55 — Illegal Configurations (Alarm A151)

ILLEGAL CONFIGURATION POSSIBLE CAUSES

Check to see if the AUX Board is an older revision not compatible with the current software. Check the red LED on the AUX Board to be sure that it is blinking in unison with the other

boards in the unit. If it is not, it is not communicating:

AUX BOARD INCORRECT REVISION

AUX BOARD SOFTWARE REV

MUST BE 3 OR HIGHER

AUX BOARD SHOULD BE AUX1, NOT AUX2

INVALID UNIT SIZE HAS BEEN ENTERED Check to be sure that a valid unit size Configuration

UNIT CONFIGURATION SET TO

FLUID IS WATER, ICE MAKING ENABLED

INVALID TYPE

- Check the LEN Communication wiring for continuity to the Main Base Board.

- Check the AUX Board DIP Switch settings for the address. For 208 volt systems, check the control transformer to be sure that it is tapped correctly. Consider cycling power to the AUX Board. Check to see if the AUX Board is an older revision not compatible with the current software.

The AUX Board software revision can be found in the vendor part number, CEPL130567-03. The -03 indicates Revision 03.

Check the part number of the AUX Board. It should have the Carrier Part Number 32GB500442EE (UTEC Part Number CEPL130567-03). This board is required for the digital compressor output as well as the Motormaster drive signal. An AUX2 Board, Carrier Part Number 332GB500432EE (UTEC Part Number CEPL130568-02) does not have the capability to supply these outputs.

Digital compressor, Configuration OPT1MLV=YES are both enabled. Only one can be enabled.

Ice mode is enabled, Configuration



OPT1FLUD= 1 (water).

tion



UNITA1.TY=YES, and hot gas Configuration



OPT2ICE.M=ENBL, but fluid type Configura-



UNITSIZE has been entered.

T203 (Loss of Communication with the Slave Chiller Alert) — This alert will be generated if Dual Chiller Control is enabled, LLEN=ENBL Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (Configura-

tion

→RSET), the chiller has been configured to be the Master

Chiller MSSL=MAST Master/Slave Select (Configura-

tion

→RSET) and it has not established or lost communication

with the Slave Chiller. When this alert is generated the dual chiller control will be disabled and the unit will operate in stand-alone mode.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check that the communication wiring between the two chillers is proper and is not grounded.

• Check to be sure that both the Master and Slave Chillers are on the same bus, CCNB CCN Bus Number (Config-

uration

→CCN).

• Check to be sure that the slave chiller address CCNA CCN Address (Configuration

→CCN) matches what is

programmed in the master chiller’s configuration for slave address, SLVA Slave Address (Configura-

tion

→RSET).

• Check for power at the slave chiller. If power is not present, this alarm will be generated.

• Check for a faulty master or slave MBB. If CCN communications is not working, this alarm will be generated.

T204 (Loss of Communication with the Master Chiller Alert) — This alert will be generated if Dual Chiller Control is enabled, LLEN=ENBL Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (Configura-

tion

→RSET), the chiller has been configured to be the Slave

Chiller MSSL=SLVE Master/Slave Select (Configura-

tion

→RSET) and it has not established or lost communication

with the Master Chiller. When this alert is generated the dual chiller control will be disabled and the unit will operate in stand-alone mode.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check that the communication wiring between the two chillers is proper and is not grounded.

• Check to be sure that both the master and slave chillers are on the same bus, CCNB CCN Bus Number (Config-

uration

→CCN).

• Check to be sure that the slave chiller address CCNA CCN Address (Configuration

→CCN) matches what is

programmed in the master chiller's configuration for slave address, SLVA Slave Address (Configura-

tion

→RSET).

• Check for power at the master chiller. If power is not present, this alarm will be generated.

• Check for a faulty master or slave MBB. If CCN communications is not working, this alarm will be generated.

T205 (Master and Slave Chiller with Same Address Alert) — This alert will be generated if Dual Chiller Control is enabled, LLEN=ENBL Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (Configura-

tion

→RSET), the chiller has been configured to be the Master

Chiller MSSL=MAST Master/Slave Select (Configura-

tion

→RSET) and both the master chiller and slave chiller have

the same address, CCNA CCN Address (Configura-

tion

→CCN). When this alert is generated the dual chiller con-

trol will be disabled and both units, master and slave, will operate in stand-alone mode.

If this condition is encountered, check to be sure that the

Slave Chiller address CCNA CCN Address (Configura-

tion

→CCN) matches what is programmed in the Master

Chiller's configuration for slave address. SLVA Slave Address (Configuration

T206 (High Leaving Chilled Water Temperature Alert)

→RSET).

— The criterion for this alert is checked when the unit is ON and the total available capacity is 100%. The alert is generated when the leaving chilled water temperature is greater than the LCWT, High LCW Alert Limit (Configuration

→OPT2) plus

the control point and the leaving chilled water temperature is

higher than it was 1 minute before the current reading. The LCWT is a delta temperature, not an absolute value. The alert will automatically reset when the leaving water temperature is less than the control point, or is less than the control point plus LCWT minus 5° F (2.8° C).

If this condition is encountered:

• Check building load.

• Check the LCWT, High LCW Alert Limit (Configura-

tion

→OPT2) value.

• Check compressor operation.

• Check water flow. A207 (Cooler Freeze Protection Alarm)

— This alarm will be generated when the leaving water temperature is below BR.FZ, Brine Freeze Point (Set Point Mode

→FRZ). When

this condition is encountered, the machine will enter Mode 16, and the Chilled Water Pump relay will be energized, even if the CPC Cooler Pump Control (Configuration Mode

→OPT1) is

OFF. If the machine is equipped with a pump, the pump will run for a minimum of 5 minutes. The unit will be shut down or prevented from starting.

The control will allow the machine to reset automatically if the leaving chilled water temperature rises above the BR.FZ Brine Freeze Point (Set Point Mode

→FRZ) plus 6°F (3.3°C).

If the alarm is generated again during the same day, it shall be a manual reset.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check the entering or leaving water thermistor for accu-

racy.

• Check water flow rate.

• Check for freezing conditions.

• Check the heat tape and other freeze protection means

for proper operation.

• Check glycol concentration and adjust BR.FZ accord-

ingly. A208 (EWT or LWT Thermistor Failure Alarm)

— This alarm will be generated if the entering water temperature, EWT Entering Fluid Temp (Run Status

→VIEW) is less than the

leaving water temperature, LWT Leaving Fluid Temp (Run

Status

→VIEW) by 3° F (1.7° C) or more for 1 minute after the

circuit has started. When this alarm is generated the chiller is shut down and prevented from starting. Chilled water pump is also shut down.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check for a correct chilled water flow.

• Check the entering and leaving water thermistors for

accuracy.

• Check to be sure the entering and leaving water thermis-

tors are correctly wired and installed in the proper location.

A220 (Condenser Pump Interlock Failure to Close At StartUp Alarm) — This alarm will be generated if the unit is configured for D.FL.S=ENBL Enable Cond Flow Switch (Con-

figuration

→OPT1) and condenser flow interlock (if used) cir-

cuit fails to close within 5 minutes of the condenser pump start. When this alarm is generated the chiller is prevented from starting or will be shut down; condenser and chilled water pumps are shut down.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check for a condenser pump failure.

• Check for power at the condenser pump.

• Check condenser pump control wiring

• Check condenser strainer for a restriction. Flush or

replace as necessary.

• Check the condenser water flow switch operation.

• Check condenser water flow switch wiring.

• If the unit utilizes a flow regulating valve for head pres-

sure control, consider disabling condenser flow switch feature.

P221 (Condenser Pump Interlock Opened During Normal Operation Pre-alarm)

A221 (Condenser Pump Interlock Opened During Normal Operation Alarm) — If the unit is configured for D.FL.S= ENBL Enable Cond Flow Switch (Configuration

→OPT1) and

condenser flow interlock (if used) circuit was established and opens for 15 seconds. When this alarm is generated the chiller is prevented from starting or will be shut down; condenser and chilled water pumps are shut down.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check for a condenser pump failure.

• Check for power at the condenser pump.

• Check condenser pump control wiring.

• Check condenser strainer for a restriction. Flush or replace as necessary.

• Check the condenser water flow switch operation.

• Check condenser water flow switch wiring.

• If the unit utilizes a flow regulating valve for head pressure control, consider disabling this feature.

A222 (Condenser Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off Alarm) — If the unit is configured for Condenser Pump Control, D.PM.E Enable Condenser Pump (Configura-

tion

→OPT1) is 1 (On when Occupied) or 2 (On with Compres-

sor), the Condenser Flow Switch is enabled, D.FL.S=ENBL Enable Cond Flow Switch (Configuration

→OPT1) and con-

denser flow interlock (if used) circuit is closed while the pump is commanded off, this alarm will be generated. When this alarm is generated the chiller is prevented from starting.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check for a welded condenser pump contactor.

• Check for a faulty condenser pump relay

• Check for a wiring error.

T302 (Strainer Blowdown Scheduled Maintenance Due)

— This alert is generated when the S.T.DN Strainer Service Countdown (Run Status

→PM) has expired. Be sure date is

correctly set: MNTH Month of Year, DAY Day of Month, and YEAR Year of Century (Time Clock

→DATE). Complete the

strainer blowdown. Set S.T.MN Strainer Maintenance Done (Run Status

→PM) to YES. Then reset the alert.

If this condition is encountered, check the following item:

• Strainer maintenance is required. T500, T501, T502 (Current Sensor Board Failure — Circuit

Ax — Alert codes 500, 501, and 502 are for compressors A1, A2, and A3 respectively. These alerts occur when the output of the CSB is a constant high value. These alerts reset automatically. If the problem cannot be resolved, the CSB must be replaced.

T950 (Loss of Communication with Water System Manager) — This alert will be generated if no communications have been received by the Main Base Board for five (5) minutes. When this occurs the Water System Manager (WSM) forces are removed. The chiller runs in stand-alone mode.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check CCN wiring.

• Check for power at the water system manager.

• Check Main Base Board for a communication failure. A951 (Loss of Communication with Chillervisor System

Manager) — This alarm will be generated if no communications have been received by the Main Base Board for five (5) minutes. When this alert is generated the Chillervisor System Manager (CSM) forces are removed, and chiller runs in standalone mode.

If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Check CCN wiring.

• Check for power at the Chillervisor System Manager.

• Check Main Base Board for a communication failure.

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES

Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

VIEW AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS



EWT Entering Fluid Temp xxx.x °F EWT



LWT Leaving Fluid Temp xxx.x °F LWT



SETP Active Setpoint xxx.x °F SP



CTPT Control Point xxx.x °F CTRL_PNT



LOD.F Load/Unload Factor xxx SMZ



STAT Control Mode 0=Service Test



OCC Occupied NO/YES OCC



MODE Override Modes in Effect NO/YES MODE



CAP Percent Total Capacity xxx CAP_T



DEM.L Active Demand Limit DEM_LIM



STGE Requested Stage x STAGE



ALRM Current Alarms and Alerts xxx ALRMALRT



TIME Time of Day 00:00 to 23:59 xx.xx TIMECOPY



MNTH Month of Year 1 to 12



DATE Day of Month 01 to 31 xx DOM



YEAR Year of Century xx YOCDISP

RUN UNIT RUN HOUR AND START



HRS.U Machine Operating Hours 0 to 999999 xxxx HRS HR_MACH



STR.U Machine Starts 0 to 1000000 xxxx CY_MACH



HR.P1 Cooler Pump Run Hours 0 to 999999.9 xxxx HRS HR_CPUMP



HR.P2 Condenser Pump Run Hours 0 to 999999.9 xxxx HRS HR_DPUMP

HOUR CIRC AND COMP RUN HOURS



HR.A1 Compressor A1 Run Hours 0 to 999999 xxxx HRS HOURS_A1



HR.A2 Compressor A2 Run Hours 0 to 999999 xxxx HRS HOURS_A2



HR.A3 Compressor A3 Run Hours 0 to 999999 xxxx HRS HOURS_A3

STRT COMPRESSOR STARTS



ST.A1 Compressor A1 Starts 0 to 999999 xxxx CY_A1



ST.A2 Compressor A2 Starts 0 to 999999 xxxx CY_A2



ST.A3 Compressor A3 Starts 0 to 999999 xxxx CY_A3

PM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE



STRN STRAINER MAINTENANCE



STRNSI.ST Strainer Srvc Interval xxxx HRS SI_STRNR



STRNS.T.DN Strainer Srvc Countdown 0 to 65535 xxxx HRS ST_CDOWN Default: 8760



STRNS.T.MN Strainer Maint. Done 0 to 65535 NO/YES ST_MAINT



ST.DT STRAINER MAINT. DATES



ST.DTS.T.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM



ST.DTS.T.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM



ST.DTS.T.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM



ST.DTS.T.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM



ST.DTS.T.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

VERS SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS



MBB CESR131482-xx-xx



EXV* CESR131172-xx-xx



AUX1* CESR131333-xx-xx



EMM* CESR131174-xx-xx



MARQ CESR131171-xx-xx



NAVI* CESR130227-xx-xx

* If these devices are not installed, they will not show in the table.

1=Off Local 2=Off CCN 3=Off Time 4=Off Emergency 5=On Local 6=On CCN 7=On Time 9=Pump Delay

(1 = January, 2 = February, etc.)

xSTAT

xx MOY

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

TEST SERVICE TEST MODE OFF/ON MAN_CTRL To enable Service Test

OUTS OUTPUTS AND PUMPS



CLR.P Cooler Pump Relay OFF/ON S_CLPMP



CND.P Condenser Pump OFF/ON S_CNDPMP



UL.TM Comp A1 Unload Time 0 to 15 xx S_A1ULTM



CC.H Crankcase Heater OFF/ON S_CCH



CW.VO Condenser Valve Open OFF/ON S_CWVO not supported



CW.VC Condenser Valve Close OFF/ON S_CWVC not supported



EXV.A EXV% Open xxx% S_EXV_A



LL.SV Liquid Line Solenoid OFF/ON S_LLSV



RMT.A Remote Alarm Relay OFF/ON S_ALM

CMPA CIRCUIT 1 COMPRESSOR TST



CC.A1 Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON S_A1_RLY



UL.TM Comp A1 Unload Time 0 to 15 xx S_A1ULTM



CC.A2 Compressor A2 Relay OFF/ON S_A2_RLY



CC.A3 Compressor A3 Relay OFF/ON S_A3_RLY



MLV Minimum Load Valve Relay OFF/ON S_MLV

mode, move Enable/Off/ Remote control switch to OFF. Change TEST to ON. Move switch to ENABLE.

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

UNIT ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMPS



CEWT Cooler Entering Fluid xxx.x °F COOL_EWT



CLWT Cooler Leaving Fluid xxx.x °F COOL_LWT



CDET Condenser Entering Fluid xxx.x °F COND_EWT



CDLT Condenser Leaving Fluid xxx.x °F COND_LWT



OAT Outside Air Temperature xxx.x °F OAT



SPT Space Temperature xxx.x °F SPT



DLWT Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid xxx.x °F DUAL_LWT

CIR.A TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A



SCT.A Saturated Condensing Tmp xxx.x °F TMP_SCTA



SST.A Saturated Suction Temp xxx.x °F TMP_SSTA



RGT.A Compr Return Gas Temp xxx.x °F TMP_RGTA



D.GAS Discharge Gas Temp xxx.x °F DISGAS



SH.A Suction Superheat Temp xxx.x ΔFSH_A

Pressures Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

PRC.A PRESSURES CIRCUIT A



DP.A Discharge Pressure xxx.x PSIG DP_A



SP.A Suction Pressure xxx.x PSIG SP_A

Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

COOL COOLING SETPOINTS



CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1 –20 to 70°F xxx.x °F CSP1 44°F



CSP.2 Cooling Setpoint 2 –20 to 70°F xxx.x °F CSP2 44°F



CSP.3 ICE Setpoint –20 to 32°F xxx.x °F CSP3 32°F

HEAD HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS



H.DP Head Setpoint 85 to 120°F xxx.x °F HSP 95°F

FRZ BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT



BR.FZ Brine Freeze Point –20 to 34°F xxx.x °F BRN_FRZ 34°F

Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

GEN.I GENERAL INPUTS



STST Start/Stop Switch STRT/STOP START



FLOW Cooler Flow Switch OFF/ON COOLFLOW



CD.FL Condenser Flow Switch OFF/ON CONDFLOW



DLS1 Demand Limit Switch 1 OFF/ON DMD_SW1



DLS2 Demand Limit Switch 2 OFF/ON DMD_SW2



ICED Ice Done OFF/ON ICE_DONE



DUAL Dual Setpoint Switch OFF/ON DUAL_IN

CRCT CIRCUIT INPUTS



FKA1 Compressor A1 Feedback OFF/ON K_A1_FBK



FKA2 Compressor A2 Feedback OFF/ON K_A2_FBK



FKA3 Compressor A3 Feedback OFF/ON K_A3_FBK



HPS.A High Pressure Switch A OFF/ON HPSA

4-20 4-20 MA INPUTS



DMND 4-20 ma Demand Signal xx.x LMT_MA



A.DL Active Demand Limit DEM_LIM



RSET 4-20 ma Reset Signal xx.x RST_MA



D.RST Degrees of Reset DEG_RST



CSP 4-20 ma Cooling Setpoint xx.x CSP_IN

Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

GEN.O GENERAL OUTPUTS



C.LWP Cooler Pump Relay OFF/ON COOLPUMP



C.DWP Condenser Pump OFF/ON CONDPUMP



ALRM Alarm State OFF/ON ALM



CD.W.O* Condenser Valve Open OFF/ON COND_WVO



CD.W.C* Condenser Valve Close OFF/ON COND_WVC

* Not supported.

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

CIR.A OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A



CC.A1 Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON K_A1_RLY



D.PER Compressor A1 Load Percent OFF/ON DIGITALP



CC.A2 Compressor A2 Relay OFF/ON K_A2_RLY



CC.A3 Compressor A3 Relay OFF/ON K_A3_RLY



CCH Crankcase Heater Relay OFF/ON CCH_RLY



LLSV Liquid Line Solenoid OFF/ON LLSV_A



MLV.R Minimum Load Valve Relay OFF/ON MLV_RLY

A.EXV



EXV.A EXV% Open OFF/ON EXV_A



APPR Circuit A Approach OFF/ON CIRA_APP



AP.SP Approach Setpoint OFF/ON APPRA_SP



X.SH.R SH Reset at Max Unl-Dig MAXSHRST



S.SH.R Digload to Start SH RST SHRSTBGN



SH_R Amount of SH Reset SH_RESET



OVR.A EXVA Override OFF/ON EXVAOVRR



SPH.A Suction Superheat Temp OFF/ON SH_A



ASH.S Active Superheat Setpt OFF/ON ACTSH_SP



AMP.S Active Mop Setpt OFF/ON ACMOP_SP



PLM.A Cir A EXV Position Limit OFF/ON PLMA

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

DISP DISPLAY CONFIGURATION



TEST Test Display LEDs OFF/ON DISPTEST



METR Metric Display OFF = English



LANG Language Selection 0 = English



PAS.E Password Enable DSBL/ENBL PASS_EBL ENBL



PASS Service Password 0 to 9999 XXXX PASSCOPY 1111

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION



TYPE Unit Type



SIZE Unit Size 15 to 74 XXX SIZE



SZA.1 Compressor A1 Size Unit Size Depen-



SZA.2 Compressor A2 Size Unit Size Depen-



SZA.3 Compressor A3 Size Unit Size Depen-



A1.TY Compressor A1 Digital? NO/YES CPA1TYPE



MAX.T Maximum A1 Unload Time 0 to 15 XX MAXULTME 7 (040,045)



D.TYP Discharge Gas Therm Type 0 = 86K

OPT1 UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE



FLUD Cooler Fluid



MLV.S Minimum Load Vlv Select NO/YES MLV_FLG NO



RG.EN Return Gas Sensor Enable DSBL/ENBL RGT_ENA



OAT.E Enable OAT Sensor DSBL/ENBL OAT_ENA



CSB.E CSB Boards Enable DSBL/ENBL CSB_ENA



CPC Cooler Pump Control OFF/ON CPC ON



PM.DY Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly 0 to 10 XX MIN PUMP_DLY 1 MIN



D.PM.E Enable Condenser Pump 0=No Control



D.FL.S Enable Cond Flow Switch DSBL/ENBL CONDFLSW DSBL



CDWS Enable Cond Wtr Sensors DSBL/ENBL CONDWTRS DSBL

OPT2 UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS



CTRL Control Method 0=Switch



LCWT High LCW Alert Limit 2 to 60°F XX LCW_LMT 60°F



DELY Minutes Off Time 0 to 15 XX DELAY 0



ICE.M Ice Mode Enable DSBL/ENBL

1 = Espanol 2 = Francais 3 = Portuguese

2=Air Cooled, 3=Water Cooled

dent

1 = 100K

1 = Water 2 = Medium Temp Brine

1=On When Occupied 2=On with Compressors

1=Occupancy 2=Occupancy 3=CCN

ON = Metric X LANGUAGE 0

XUNIT_TYP

XX SIZE_A1

XX SIZE_A2

XX SIZE_A3

X DGASTYPE 0

X FLUIDTYP 1 = Water

X CONDPMPE 0=No Control

XCONTROL0=Switch

(Requires EMM)

DISPUNIT OFF = English

10 (020,030)

ICE_CNFG DSBL

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

EXV.A CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION



EXV.L EXV Opening at Low LWT



LWT.L LWT for EXV Min Opening



EXV.H EXV Opening at High LWT



LWT.H LWT for EXV Max Opening



MIN.A EXV CIRC.A Min Position



RNG.A EXVA Steps in Range



SPD.A EXVA Steps Per Second



POF.A EXVA Fail Position In%



MIN.A EXVA Minimum Steps



MAX.A EXVA Maximum Steps



OVR.A EXVA Overrun Steps



TYP.A EXVA Stepper Type 0 = UNIPOLAR



H.SCT High SCT Threshold



X.PCT Open EXV X% on 2nd COMP



X.PER Move EXV X% on DISCRSOL



DELY Lag Start Delay



L.DL.T Low SH Delta T - EXV Move



SHR.T EXV Rate Threshold



LEXM Low SH Override EXV Move

CCN CCN NETWORK CONFIGS



CCNA CCN Address 1 to 239 XXX CCNADD 1



CCNB CCN Bus Number 0 to 239 XXX CCNBUS 0



BAUD CCN Baud Rate 1 = 2400

RSET



CRST Cooling Reset Type 0 = No Reset



MA.DG 4-20 - Degrees Reset –30 to 30F XX.XΔF MA_DEG 10.0F



RM.NO Remote - No Reset Temp 0 to 125°F XXX.X °F REM_NO 10.0F



RM.F Remote - Full Reset Temp 0 to 125°F XXX.X °F REM_FULL 0.0F



RM.DG Remote - Degrees Reset –30 to 30F



RT.NO Return - No Reset Temp 0 to 30F XXX.XΔF RTN_NO 10F



RT.F Return - Full Reset Temp 0 to 10F XXX.XΔF RTN_FULL 0.0F



RT.DG Return - Degrees Reset –30 to 30F



DMDC Demand Limit Select 0 = None



DM20 Demand Limit at 20 mA 0 to 100 XXX% DMT20MA 100



SHNM Loadshed Group Number 0 to 99 XXX SHED_NUM 0



SHDL Loadshed Demand Delta 0 to 60 XXX% SHED_DEL 0



SHTM Maximum Loadshed Time 0 to 120 XXX SHED_TIM 60



DLS1 Demand Limit Switch 1 0 to 100 XXX% DLSWSP1 80



DLS2 Demand Limit Switch 2 0 to 100 XXX% DLSWSP2 50



LLEN Lead/Lag Chiller Enable DSBL/ENBL LL_ENA DSBL



MSSL Master/Slave Select SLVE/MAST MS_SEL MAST



SLVA Slave Address 0 to 239 XXX SLV_ADDR 0



LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select 0 = Master Leads



LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta 40 to 400 hours XXX LL_BAL_D 168



LLDY Lag Start Delay 0 to 30 minutes XXX LL_DELAY 5 minutes



PARA Parallel Configuration NO/YES PARALLEL YES

RESET COOL TEMP

0 to 50% 20 to 40 F 0 to 70% 20 to 70 F

0 to 100 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 100 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535

1 = BIPOLAR

50 to 140 0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 100 0 to 240 –1.0 to 1.0F

0.4 to 3.0

2 = 4800 3 = 9600 4 =19,200 5 =38,400

1 = 4 to 20 mA Input 2 = Outdoor Air Temp 3 = Return Fluid 4 = Space Temp

1 = Switch (Requires EMM) 2 = 4 to 20 mA Input (Requires EMM) 3 = CCN Loadshed

1 = Slave Leads 2 = Automatic

XX% 25% XX° F 10 F XX% 50% XX° F 35 F

XXX 2 XXXXX 3690 XXXXX 150 XXX 0 XXXXX 0 XXXXX 3690 XXX 167 0,1 1

XXX 115 XX 10 XX 5 XXX 10

XXX 6

XX.X F 0.2F

X.X% 1.0%

X CCNBAUDD 3 = 9600

XX.X ΔF

XX.XΔF X

X LL_BAL 0 = Master Leads

CRST_TYP 0 = No Reset

REM_DEG 0.0F

RTN_DEG 0.0F DMD_CTRL 0 = None

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

SLCT SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD



CLSP Cooling Set Point Select 0 = Single



RL.S Ramp Load Select DSBL/ENBL RAMP_EBL ENBL



CRMP Cooling Ramp Loading 0.2 to 2 X.X CRAMP 1.0



SCHD Schedule Number 0 to 99 XX SCHEDNUM 0



Z.GN Deadband Multiplier 1 to 4 X.X Z_GAIN 1.0

SERV



EN.A1



EN.A2 Enable Compressor A2



EN.A3 Enable Compressor A3 DSBL/ENBL ENABLEA3



REV.R Reverse Rotation Enable DSBL/ENBL REVR_ENA ENBL

BCST BROADCAST CONFIGURATION



T.D.BC CCN Time/Date Broadcast OFF/ON CCNBC OFF



OAT.B CCN OAT Broadcast OFF/ON OATBC OFF



G.S.BC Global Schedule Broadcst OFF/ON GSBC OFF



BC.AK CCN Broadcast Ack'er OFF/ON CCNBCACK OFF

SERVICE CONFIGURATION Enable Compressor A1 DSBL/ENBL

1 = Dual Switch 2 = Dual CCN Occupied 3 = 4 to 20 mA Input

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

TIME TIME OF DAY



HH.MM Hour and Minute 0 to 65535 XXXXX TIME

DATE MONTH, DATE, DAY, AND YEAR



MNTH Month of Year 1 to 12 (1 = January,



DOM Day of Month 1 to 31 XX DOM



DAY Day of Week 1 to 7 (1 = Monday,



YEAR Year of Century 1999 to 2098 XXXX YOCDISP

DST DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME



STR.M Month 1 to 12 XX STARTM 4



STR.W Week 1 to 5 X STARTW 1



STR.D Day 1 to 7 X STARTD 7



MIN.A Minutes to Add 0 to 90 XX MINADD 60



STP.M Month 1 to 12 XX STOPM 10



STP.W Week 1 to 5 XX STOPW 5



STP.D Day 1 to 7 XX STOPD 7



MIN.S Minutes to Subtract 0 to 90 XX MINSUB 60

HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES



HD.01 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 01



HD.01MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON01



HD.01DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY01



HD.01LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN01



HD.02 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 02



HD.02MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON02



HD.02DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY02



HD.02LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN02



HD.03 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 03



HD.03MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON03



HD.03DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY03



HD.03LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN03



HD.04 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 04



HD.04MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON04



HD.04DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY04



HD.04LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN04



HD.05 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 05



HD.05MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON05



HD.05DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY05



HD.05LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN05



HD.06 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 06



HD.06MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON06



HD.06DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY06



HD.06LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN06



HD.07 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 07



HD.07MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON07



HD.07DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY07



HD.07LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN07



HD.08 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 08



HD.08MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON08



HD.08DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY08



HD.08LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN08



HD.09 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 09



HD.09MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON09



HD.09DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY09



HD.09LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN09



HD.10 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 10



HD.10MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON10



HD.10DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY10



HD.10LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN10

2 = February, etc.)

2 = Tuesday, etc.)

X CLSP_TYP 0 = Single

DSBL/ENBL

XX MOY

XDOWDISP

ENABLEA1 ENABLEA2

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES



HD.11 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 11



HD.11MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON11



HD.11DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY11



HD.11LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN11



HD.12 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 12



HD.12MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON12



HD.12DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY12



HD.12LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN12



HD.13 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 13



HD.13MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON13



HD.13DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY13



HD.13LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN13



HD.14 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 14



HD.14MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON14



HD.14DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY14



HD.14LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN14



HD.15 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 15



HD.15MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON15



HD.15DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY15



HD.15LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN15



HD.16 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 16



HD.16MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON16



HD.16DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY16



HD.16LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN16



HD.17 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 17



HD.17MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON17



HD.17DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY17



HD.17LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN17



HD.18 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 18



HD.18MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON18



HD.18DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY18



HD.18LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN18



HD.19 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 19



HD.19MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON19



HD.19DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY19



HD.19LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN19



HD.20 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 20



HD.20MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON20



HD.20DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY20



HD.20LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN20



HD.21 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 21



HD.21MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON21



HD.21DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY21



HD.21LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN21



HD.22 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 22



HD.22MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON22



HD.22DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY22



HD.22LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN22



HD.23 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 23



HD.23MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON23



HD.23DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY23



HD.23LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN23



HD.24 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 24



HD.24MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON24



HD.24DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY24



HD.24LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN24



HD.25 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 25



HD.25MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON25



HD.25DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY25



HD.25LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN25



HD.26 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 26



HD.26MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON26



HD.26DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY26



HD.26LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN26



HD.27 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 27



HD.27MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON27



HD.27DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY27



HD.27LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN27



HD.28 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 28



HD.28MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON28



HD.28DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY28



HD.28LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN28



HD.29 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 29



HD.29MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON29



HD.29DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY29



HD.29LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN29



HD.30 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 30



HD.30MON Holiday Start Month 0 to 12 XX HOLMON30



HD.30DAY Start Day 0 to 31 XX HOLDAY30



HD.30LEN Duration (days) 0 to 99 XX HOLLEN30

SCH.N SCHEDULE NUMBER 0 to 99 XX SCHEDNUM 0

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

SCH.L LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE



PER.1 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1



PER.1OCC.1 Period Occupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER1OCC



PER.1UNC.1 Period Unoccupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER1UNC



PER.1MON.1 Monday In Period NO/YES PER1MON



PER.1TUE.1 Tuesday In Period NO/YES PER1TUE



PER.1WED.1 Wednesday In Period NO/YES PER1WED



PER.1THU.1 Thursday In Period NO/YES PER1THU



PER.1FRI.1 Friday In Period NO/YES PER1FRI



PER.1SAT.1 Saturday In Period NO/YES PER1SAT



PER.1SUN.1 Sunday In Period NO/YES PER1SUN



PER.1HOL.1 Holiday In Period NO/YES PER1HOL



PER.2 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 2



PER.2OCC.2 Period Occupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER2OCC



PER.2UNC.2 Period Unoccupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER2UNC



PER.2MON.2 Monday In Period NO/YES PER2MON



PER.2TUE.2 Tuesday In Period NO/YES PER2TUE



PER.2WED.2 Wednesday In Period NO/YES PER2WED



PER.2THU.2 Thursday In Period NO/YES PER2THU



PER.2FRI.2 Friday In Period NO/YES PER2FRI



PER.2SAT.2 Saturday In Period NO/YES PER2SAT



PER.2SUN.2 Sunday In Period NO/YES PER2SUN



PER.2HOL.2 Holiday In Period NO/YES PER2HOL



PER.3 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 3



PER.3OCC.3 Period Occupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER3OCC



PER.3UNC.3 Period Unoccupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER3UNC



PER.3MON.3 Monday In Period NO/YES PER3MON



PER.3TUE.3 Tuesday In Period NO/YES PER3TUE



PER.3WED.3 Wednesday In Period NO/YES PER3WED



PER.3THU.3 Thursday In Period NO/YES PER3THU



PER.3FRI.3 Friday In Period NO/YES PER3FRI



PER.3SAT.3 Saturday In Period NO/YES PER3SAT



PER.3SUN.3 Sunday In Period NO/YES PER3SUN



PER.3HOL.3 Holiday In Period NO/YES PER3HOL



PER.4 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 4



PER.4OCC.4 Period Occupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER4OCC



PER.4UNC.4 Period Unoccupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER4UNC



PER.4MON.4 Monday In Period NO/YES PER4MON



PER.4TUE.4 Tuesday In Period NO/YES PER4TUE



PER.4WED.4 Wednesday In Period NO/YES PER4WED



PER.4THU.4 Thursday In Period NO/YES PER4THU



PER.4FRI.4 Friday In Period NO/YES PER4FRI



PER.4SAT.4 Saturday In Period NO/YES PER4SAT



PER.4SUN.4 Sunday In Period NO/YES PER4SUN



PER.4HOL.4 Holiday In Period NO/YES PER4HOL



PER.5 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 5



PER.5OCC.5 Period Occupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER5OCC



PER.5UNC.5 Period Unoccupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER5UNC



PER.5MON.5 Monday In Period NO/YES PER5MON



PER.5TUE.5 Tuesday In Period NO/YES PER5TUE



PER.5WED.5 Wednesday In Period NO/YES PER5WED



PER.5THU.5 Thursday In Period NO/YES PER5THU



PER.5FRI.5 Friday In Period NO/YES PER5FRI



PER.5SAT.5 Saturday In Period NO/YES PER5SAT



PER.5SUN.5 Sunday In Period NO/YES PER5SUN



PER.5HOL.5 Holiday In Period NO/YES PER5HOL



PER.6 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 6



PER.6OCC.6 Period Occupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER6OCC



PER.6UNC.6 Period Unoccupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER6UNC



PER.6MON.6 Monday In Period NO/YES PER6MON



PER.6TUE.6 Tuesday In Period NO/YES PER6TUE



PER.6WED.6 Wednesday In Period NO/YES PER6WED



PER.6THU.6 Thursday In Period NO/YES PER6THU



PER.6FRI.6 Friday In Period NO/YES PER6FRI



PER.6SAT.6 Saturday In Period NO/YES PER6SAT



PER.6SUN.6 Sunday In Period NO/YES PER6SUN



PER.6HOL.6 Holiday In Period NO/YES PER6HOL



PER.7 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 7



PER.7OCC.7 Period Occupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER7OCC



PER.7UNC.7 Period Unoccupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER7UNC



PER.7MON.7 Monday In Period NO/YES PER7MON



PER.7TUE.7 Tuesday In Period NO/YES PER7TUE



PER.7WED.7 Wednesday In Period NO/YES PER7WED



PER.7THU.7 Thursday In Period NO/YES PER7THU



PER.7FRI.7 Friday In Period NO/YES PER7FRI



PER.7SAT.7 Saturday In Period NO/YES PER7SAT



PER.7SUN.7 Sunday In Period NO/YES PER7SUN



PER.7HOL.7 Holiday In Period NO/YES PER7HOL

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

SCH.L (cont) LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE



PER.8 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 8



PER.8OCC.8 Period Occupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER8OCC



PER.8UNC.8 Period Unoccupied Time 0 to 6144 XX:XX PER8UNC



PER.8MON.8 Monday In Period NO/YES PER8MON



PER.8TUE.8 Tuesday In Period NO/YES PER8TUE



PER.8WED.8 Wednesday In Period NO/YES PER8WED



PER.8THU.8 Thursday In Period NO/YES PER8THU



PER.8FRI.8 Friday In Period NO/YES PER8FRI



PER.8SAT.8 Saturday In Period NO/YES PER8SAT



PER.8SUN.8 Sunday In Period NO/YES PER8SUN



PER.8HOL.8 Holiday In Period NO/YES PER8HOL

OVR SCHEDULE OVERRIDE



OVR.T Timed Override Hours 0 to 4 hours X OVR_EXT 0



OVR.L Override Time Limit 0 to 4 hours X OTL 0



T.OVR Timed Override NO/YES TIMEOVER NO

Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT



MD01 CSM controlling Chiller OFF/ON MODE_1



MD02 WSM controlling Chiller OFF/ON MODE_2



MD03 Master/Slave control OFF/ON MODE_3



MD05 Ramp Load Limited OFF/ON MODE_5



MD06 Timed Override in effect OFF/ON MODE_6



MD07 Low Cooler Suction TempA OFF/ON MODE_7



MD09 Slow Change Override OFF/ON MODE_9



MD10 Minimum OFF time active OFF/ON MODE_10



MD13 Dual Setpoint OFF/ON MODE_13



MD14 Temperature Reset OFF/ON MODE_14



MD15 Demand/Sound Limited OFF/ON MODE_15



MD16 Cooler Freeze Protection OFF/ON MODE_16



MD17 Low Temperature Cooling OFF/ON MODE_17



MD18 High Temperature Cooling OFF/ON MODE_18



MD19 Making ICE OFF/ON MODE_19



MD20 Storing ICE OFF/ON MODE_20



MD21 High SCT Circuit A OFF/ON MODE_21



MD23 Minimum Comp. On Time OFF/ON MODE_23



MD24 Pump Off Delay Time OFF/ON MODE_24



MDAO Circuit A Trio Oil Mgmt OFF/ON MD_A_OIL

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT COMMENT

CRNT CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS



AA01



AA02



AA03



AA04



AA05



AA06



AA07



AA08



AA09



AA10



AA11



AA12



AA13



AA14



AA15



AA16



AA17



AA18



AA19



AA20



AA21



AA22



AA23



AA24



AA25 RCRN Reset All Current Alarms NO/YES ALRESET HIST ALARM HISTORY



AL01



AL02



AL03



AL04



AL05



AL06



AL07



AL08



AL09



AL10



AL11



AL12



AL13



AL14



AL15



AL16



AL17



AL18



AL19



AL20

Current Alarms 1-25

Alarm History 1-20

AXXX TXXX PXXX

Alarms are shown as AXXX Alerts are shown as TXXX PreAlerts are shown as PXXX

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES

CCN DISPLAY TABLES

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

A-UNIT GENERAL UNIT PARAMETERS

Control Mode 10-char ASCII STAT Occupied No/Yes OCC CCN Chiller Stop/Start CHIL_S_S forcible Alarm State 6-char ASCII ALM Active Demand Limit NNN % DEM_LIM forcible Override Modes in Effect No/Yes MODE Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAP_T Requested Stage NN STAGE Active Setpoint NNN.n degF SP Control Point NNN.n degF CTRL_PNT forcible Degrees of Reset NN.n deltaF DEG_RST Entering Fluid Temp NNN.n degF EWT Leaving Fluid Temp NNN.n degF LWT Emergency Stop Enable/EMStop EMSTOP forcible Minutes Left for Start 5-char ASCII MIN_LEFT

PUMPS Cooler Pump Relay Off/On COOLPUMP Condenser Pump Off/On CONDPUMP Cooler Flow Switch Off/On COOLFLOW

CIRCA_AN CIRCUIT A ANALOG

CIRCADIO CIRCUIT A DISCRETE INPUTS/

OPTIONS UNIT PARAMETERS

Condenser Flow Switch Off/On CONDFLOW

PARAMETERS Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAPA_T Percent Available Cap. NNN % CAPA_A Discharge Pressure NNN.n PSIG DP_A Suction Pressure NNN.n PSIG SP_A Head Setpoint NNN.n degF HSP Saturated Condensing Tmp NNN.n degF TMP_SCTA Saturated Suction Temp NNN.n degF TMP_SSTA Compr Return Gas Temp NNN.n degF TMP_RGTA Discharge Gas Temp NNN.n degF DISGAS Suction Superheat Temp NNN.n deltaF SH_A

OUTPUTS CIRC. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS

Compressor A1 Relay Off/On K_A1_RLY Compressor A1 Unload Time NN secs ALUNLTME Compressor A2 Relay Off/On K_A2_RLY Compressor A3 Relay Off/On K_A3_RLY Minimum Load Valve Relay Off/On MLV_RLY

CIRC. A DISCRETE INPUTS Compressor A1 Feedback Off/On K_A1_FBK Compressor A2 Feedback Off/On K_A2_FBK Compressor A3 Feedback Off/On K_A3_FBK

UNIT ANALOG VALUES Cooler Entering Fluid NNN.n degF COOL_EWT Cooler Leaving Fluid NNN.n degF COOL_LWT Condenser Entering Fluid NNN.n degF COND_EWT Condenser Leaving Fluid NNN.n degF COND_LWT Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid NNN.n degF DUAL_LWT

TEMPERATURE RESET 4-20 ma Reset Signal NN.n milliAmps RST_MA Outside Air Temperature NNN.n degF OAT forcible Space Temperature NNN.n degF SPT forcible

DEMAND LIMIT 4-20 ma Demand Signal NN.n milliAmps LMT_MA Demand Limit Switch 1 Off/On DMD_SW1 Demand Limit Switch 2 Off/On DMD_SW2 CCN Loadshed Signal N DL_STAT

MISCELLANEOUS Dual Setpoint Switch Off/On DUAL_IN Cooler LWT Setpoint NNN.n degF LWT_SP Ice Done Off/On ICE_DONE

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

EXVA_TAB

EXVA Position in Steps NNNNNN steps EXVAPOSS EXVA Position in Percent NNNN.nn % EXVAPOSP EXVA Commanded Steps NNNNNN steps EXVACMDS EXVA Run Status NNN EXVASTAT EXVA Write Command Off/On EXVARITE EXVA Command Byte NNN EXVACMDB EXVA Absolute Percentage NNNN.nn % EXVAABSP EXVA Delta Percentage NNNNN.n % EXVADELP Saturated Suction Temp NNN.n degF TMP_SSTA Compr Return Gas Temp NNN.n degF TMP_RGTA Discharge Gas Temp NNN.n degF DISGAS EXV % Open NNN % EXV_A Amount of SH Reset NNN.n deltaF SH_RESET EXVA Override NNNNN EXVAOVRR EXVA Steps in Range NNNNN steps EXVARANG EXVA Steps Per Second NNNNN EXVARATE EXVA Fail Position in % NNNN.nn % EXVAPOSF EXVA Minimum Steps NNNNN steps EXVAMINS EXVA Maximum Steps NNNNN steps EXVAMAXS EXVA Overrun Steps NNNNN steps EXVAOVRS EXVA Stepper Type NNN EXVATYPE

STRTHOUR

CURRMODS

Machine Operating Hours NNNNNN hours HR_MACH Machine Starts NNNNNN hours CY_MACH Compressor A1 Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_A1 Compressor A2 Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_A2 Compressor A3 Run Hours NNNNNN.n HR_A3 Compressor A1 Starts NNNNNN CY_A1 Compressor A2 Starts NNNNNN CY_A2 Compressor A3 Starts NNNNNN CY_A3

PUMP HOURS Cooler Pump Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_CPUMP Condenser Pump Run Hours NNNNNN.n hours HR_DPUMP

CSM controlling Chiller Off/On MODE_1 WSM controlling Chiller Off/On MODE_2 Master/Slave control Off/On MODE_3 Ramp Load Limited Off/On MODE_5 Timed Override in effect Off/On MODE_6 Low Cooler Suction TempA Off/On MODE_7 Slow Change Override Off/On MODE_9 Minimum OFF time active Off/On MODE_10 Dual Setpoint Off/On MODE_13 Temperature Reset Off/On MODE_14 Demand/Sound Limited Off/On MODE_15 Cooler Freeze Protection Off/On MODE_16 Low Temperature Cooling Off/On MODE_17 High Temperature Cooling Off/On MODE_18 Making ICE Off/On MODE_19 Storing ICE Off/On MODE_20 High SCT Circuit A Off/On MODE_21 Minimum Comp. On Time Off/On MODE_23 Pump Off Delay Time Off/On MODE_24 Circuit A Trio Oil Mgmt Off/On MD_A_OIL

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

ALARMS

VERSIONS

LOADFACT CAPACITY CONTROL

LEARNFNS

PM-STRN

TESTMODE

Active Alarm #1 4-char ASCII ALARM01C Active Alarm #2 4-char ASCII ALARM02C Active Alarm #3 4-char ASCII ALARM03C Active Alarm #4 4-char ASCII ALARM04C Active Alarm #5 4-char ASCII ALARM05C Active Alarm #6 4-char ASCII ALARM06C Active Alarm #7 4-char ASCII ALARM07C Active Alarm #8 4-char ASCII ALARM08C Active Alarm #9 4-char ASCII ALARM09C Active Alarm #10 4-char ASCII ALARM10C Active Alarm #11 4-char ASCII ALARM11C Active Alarm #12 4-char ASCII ALARM12C Active Alarm #13 4-char ASCII ALARM13C Active Alarm #14 4-char ASCII ALARM14C Active Alarm #15 4-char ASCII ALARM15C Active Alarm #16 4-char ASCII ALARM16C Active Alarm #17 4-char ASCII ALARM17C Active Alarm #18 4-char ASCII ALARM18C Active Alarm #19 4-char ASCII ALARM19C Active Alarm #20 4-char ASCII ALARM20C Active Alarm #21 4-char ASCII ALARM21C Active Alarm #22 4-char ASCII ALARM22C Active Alarm #23 4-char ASCII ALARM23C Active Alarm #24 4-char ASCII ALARM24C Active Alarm #25 4-char ASCII ALARM25C

CESR131172- 5-char ASCII EXV CESR131333- 5-char ASCII AUX CESR131482- 5-char ASCII MBB CESR131174- 5-char ASCII EMM CESR131171- 5-char ASCII MARQUEE CESR131227- 5-char ASCII NAVIGATOR

Load/Unload Factor NNN SMZ Control Point NNN.n degF CTRL_PNT Entering Fluid Temp NNN.n degF EWT Leaving Fluid Temp NNN.n degF LWT Ramp Load Limited Off/On MODE_5 Slow Change Override Off/On MODE_9 Cooler Freeze Protection Off/On MODE_16 Low Temperature Cooling Off/On MODE_17 High Temperature Cooling Off/On MODE_18 Minimum Comp. On Time Off/On MODE_23

SCT Delta for Comp A1 NNN.n deltaF A1SCTDT SCT Delta for Comp A2 NNN.n deltaF A2SCTDT SCT Delta for Comp A3 NNN.n deltaF A3SCTDT

Strainer Srvc Interval NNNNN hours SI_STRNR Strainer Srvc Countdown NNNNN hours ST_CDOWN Strainer Maint. Done No/Yes ST_MAINT Strainer Maint. Date 15-char ASCII STRN_PM0 Strainer Maint. Date 15-char ASCII STRN_PM1 Strainer Maint. Date 15-char ASCII STRN_PM2 Strainer Maint. Date 15-char ASCII STRN_PM3 Strainer Maint. Date 15-char ASCII STRN_PM4

Service Test Mode Off/On NET_CTRL Compressor A1 Relay Off/On S_A1_RLY Compressor A2 Relay Off/On S_A2_RLY Compressor A3 Relay Off/On S_A3_RLY Cooler Pump Relay Off/On S_CLPMP Condenser Pump Off/On S_CNDPMP Comp A1 Unload Time NN secs S_A1ULTM Remote Alarm Relay Off/On S_ALM

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

RUNTEST

DUALCHIL

Percent Total Capacity NNN % CAPA_T Percent Available Cap. NNN % CAPA_A Discharge Pressure NNN.n PSIG DP_A Suction Pressure NNN.n PSIG SP_A Saturated Condensing Tmp NNN.n degF TMP_SCTA Saturated Suction Temp NNN.n degF TMP_SSTA Compr Return Gas Temp NNN.n degF TMP_RGTA Discharge Gas Temp NNN.n degF DISGAS Suction Superheat Temp NNN.n deltaF SH_A Compressor A1 Relay Off/On K_A1_RLY Compressor A2 Relay Off/On K_A2_RLY Compressor A3 Relay Off/On K_A3_RLY Minimum Load Valve Relay Off/On MLV_RLY Compressor A1 Feedback Off/On K_A1_FBK Compressor A2 Feedback Off/On K_A2_FBK Compressor A3 Feedback Off/On K_A3_FBK Outside Air Temperature NNN.n degF OAT Space Temperature NNN.n degF SPT Cooler Pump Relay Off/On COOLPUMP Condenser Pump Off/On CONDPUMP Cooler Entering Fluid NNN.n degF COOL_EWT Cooler Leaving Fluid NNN.n degF COOL_LWT Condenser Entering Fluid NNN.n degF COND_EWT Condenser Leaving Fluid NNN.n degF COND_LWT Cooler Flow Switch Off/On COOLFLOW

Dual Chiller Link Good? No/Yes DC_LINK Master Chiller Role 12-char ASCII MC_ROLE Slave Chiller Role 12-char ASCII SC_ROLE Lead Chiller Ctrl Point NNN.n degF LEAD_CP Lag Chiller Ctrl Point NNN.n degF LAG_CP Control Point NNN.n degF CTRL_PNT Cool EnteringFluid-Slave NNN.n degF COOLEWTS Cool Leaving Fluid-Slave NNN.n degF COOLLWTS Cooler Entering Fluid NNN.n degF COOL_EWT Cooler Leaving Fluid NNN.n degF COOL_LWT Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid NNN.n degF DUAL_LWT Percent Avail.Capacity NNN % CAP_A Percent Avail.Cap.Slave NNN % CAP_A_S Lag Start Delay Time 5-char ASCII LAGDELAY Load/Unload Factor NNN SMZ Load/Unload Factor-Slave NNNN SMZSLAVE Lead SMZ Clear Commanded No/Yes LEADSMZC Lag SMZ Clear Commanded No/Yes LAG_SMZC Lag Commanded Off? No/Yes LAG_OFF Dual Chill Lead CapLimit NNN.n % DCLDCAPL Dual Chill Lag CapLimit NNN.n % DCLGCAPL

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME DEFAULT

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION

OPTIONS1 OPTIONS 1 CONFIGURATION

Unit Type N UNIT_TYP Unit Dependent Unit Size NNN tons SIZE Unit Size Compressor A1 Size NNN tons SIZE_A1 Unit Size Dependent Compressor A2 Size NNN tons SIZE_A2 Unit Size Dependent Compressor A3 Size NNN tons SIZE_A3 Unit Size Dependent Suction Superheat Setpt NN.n deltaF SH_SP 9.0 deg F Compressor A1 Digital? No/Yes CPA1TYPE Unit Dependent Maximum A1 Unload Time NN secs MAXULTME 10 - 020 to 030

Cooler Fluid N 1=Water

Minimum Load Vlv Select No/Yes MLV_FLG No Return Gas Sensor Enable Disable/Enable RGT_ENA Disable Enable OAT Sensor Disable/Enable OAT_ENA Disable CSB Boards Enable Disable/Enable CSB_ENA Enable Reverse Rotation Enable Disable/Enable REVR_ENA Enable Cooler Pump Control Off/On CPC Off Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly NN mins PUMP_DLY 1 EMM Module Installed No/Yes EMM_BRD No Enable Condenser Pump N 0=No Control

Enable Cond Wtr Sensors Disable/Enable CONDWTRS Disable Enable Cond Flow Switch Disable/Enable CONDFLSW Disable

2=Medium Temperature Brine

1=On When Occupied 2=On with Compressors

FLUIDTYP 1=Water

CONDPMPE 0=No Conrol

7 - 035 to 045

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME DEFAULT

OPTIONS2 OPTIONS 2 CONFIGURATION

SCHEDOVR TIME OVERRIDE SETUP

RESETCON TEMPERATURE RESET AND

DUALCHILL DUAL CHILLER

DISPLAY MARQUEE DISPLAY SETUP

EXVACONF EXV CIRCUIT A

Control Method N CONTROL 0 Loading Sequence Select N SEQ_TYPE 1 Lead/Lag Circuit Select N LEAD_TYP 1 Cooling Setpoint Select N CLSP_TYP 0 Ramp Load Select Disable/Enable RAMP_EBL Enable High LCW Alert Limit NN.n deltaF LCW_LMT 60.0 Minutes Off time NN mins DELAY 0 Deadband Multiplier N.n Z_GAIN 1.0 Ice Mode Enable Disable/Enable ICE_CNFG Disable

Schedule Number NN SCHEDNUM 1 Override Time Limit N hours OTL 0 Timed Override Hours N hours OVR_EXT 0 Timed Override No/Yes TIMEOVER No

DEMAND LIMIT COOLING RESET

Cooling Reset Type N CRST_TYP 0 4-20 MA RESET

4-20 - Degrees Reset NNN.n deltaF MA_DEG 10.0 REMOTE RESET

Remote - No Reset Temp NNN.n degF REM_NO 10.0 Remote - Full Reset Temp NNN.n degF REM_FULL 0.0 Remote - Degrees Reset NNN.n deltaF REM_DEG 0.0

RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET Return - No Reset Temp NNN.n deltaF RTN_NO 10.0 Return - Full Reset Temp NNN.n deltaF RTN_FULL 0.0 Return - Degrees Reset NNN.n deltaF RTN_DEG 0.0

DEMAND LIMIT Demand Limit Select N DMD_CTRL 0 Demand Limit at 20 mA NNN.n % DMT20MA 100.0 Loadshed Group Number NN SHED_NUM 0 Loadshed Demand Delta NN % SHED_DEL 0 Maximum Loadshed Time NNN mins SHED_TIM 60 Demand Limit Switch 1 NNN % DLSWSP1 80 Demand Limit Switch 2 NNN % DLSWSP2 50

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS LEAD/LAG Lead/Lag Chiller Enable Disable/Enable LL_ENA Disable Master/Slave Select Master/Slave MS_SEL Master Slave Address NNN SLV_ADDR 2 Lead/Lag Balance Select N LL_BAL 0 Lead/Lag Balance Delta NNN hours LL_BAL_D 168 Lag Start Delay NN mins LL_DELAY 5 Parallel Configuration No/Yes PARALLEL Yes

Service Password NNNN PASSWORD 1111 Password Enable Disable/Enable PASS_EBL Enable Metric Display Off/On DISPUNIT Off Language Selection N LANGUAGE 0

CONFIGURATION EXV Opening at Low LWT NNN.N % EXV_Y1 25 LWT for EXV Min Opening NNN.N LWT_X1 10 EXV Opening at High LWT NNN.N % EXV_Y2 50 LWT for EXV Max Opening NNN.N °F LWT_X2 35 EXV Circ. A Min Position NNN.N % EXVAMINP 2 EXVA Steps in Range NNNNN steps EXVARANG 2500 EXVA Steps Per Second NNNNN EXVARATE 150 EXVA Fail Position In % NNNN.NN % EXVAPOSF 0 EXVA Minimum Steps NNNNN steps EXVAMINS 0 EXVA Maximum Steps NNNNN steps EXVAMAXS 2500 EXVA Overrun Steps NNNNN steps EXVAOVRS 167 EXVA Stepper Type NNN EXVATYPE 1 High SCT Threshold NNN.N °F HIGH_SCT 115 Open EXV X% on 2nd comp NNN.N % EXV_HSCT 10 Move EXV X% on DISCRSOL NNN.N % EXVDISCR 5 Lag Start Delay NNN sec DELAYLAG 10 SH Reset Maximum NNN.N ^F MAXSHRST 11 Cap at SH Offset Maximum NNN.N % SHRSTBGN 25 SH Rate Threshold NNN.N ^F SHR_THR 0.2 Low SH DeltaT EXV Move NNN sec LSH_DL_T 60 Low SH Override EXV Move NNN.N % LSH_EXVM 1

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN SERVICE TABLES

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME DEFAULT

SERVICE SERVICE

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME DEFAULT

SETPOINT SETPOINT

Brine Freeze Point NNN.n degF BRN_FRZ 34.0 COMPRESSOR ENABLE

Enable Compressor A1 Disable/Enable ENABLEA1 Unit Dependent Enable Compressor A2 Disable/Enable ENABLEA2 Unit Dependent Enable Compressor A3 Disable/Enable ENABLEA3 Unit Dependent

CCN SETPOINT TABLES

COOLING Cooling Setpoint 1 NNN.n degF CSP1 44.0 Cooling Setpoint 2 NNN.n degF CSP2 44.0 ICE Setpoint NNN.n degF CSP3 32.0

RAMP LOADING Cooling Ramp Loading N.n CRAMP 1.0 Brine Freeze Point NNN.n degF BRN_FRZ 34.0

APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION

Fig. B — Address Rotary Switches

Fig. A — UPC Open Controller

BACNET BAUD RATE DIP SWITCHES

ADDRESS ROTARY SWITCHES

POWER LED

RUN LED

ERROR LED

BACNET CONNECTION (BAS PORT)

BT485 TERMINATOR

Tx2 LED

Rx2 LED

Tx1 LED

Rx1 LED

EIA-485 JUMPERS

* BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE (American Society

of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers).

† BACview is a registered trademark of Automated Logic Corporation.

The following section is used to configure the UPC Open controller which is used when the BACnet* communication option is selected. The UPC Open controller is mounted in the main control box per unit components arrangement diagrams.

TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The user must give the UPC Open controller an address that is unique on the BACnet network. Perform the following procedure to assign an address:

1. If the UPC Open controller is powered, pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's power terminals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the address each time power is applied to it.

2. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. A and B), set the controller's address. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens digit of the address, and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones digit.

As an example in Fig. B, if the controller’s address is 25, point the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on the Ones (1's) switch to 5.

10's

1's

BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS — The UPC Open controller also has a BACnet Device Instance address. This Device Instance MUST be unique for the complete BACnet system in which the UPC Open controller is installed. The Device Instance is auto generated by default and is derived by adding the MAC address to the end of the Network Number. The Network Number of a new UPC Open controller is 16101, but it can be changed using i-Vu

Tools or BACView† device. By default, a MAC address of 20 will result in a Device Instance of 16101 + 20 which would be a Device Instance of

1610120.

APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Fig. C — DIP Switches

Fig. D — Network Wiring

CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/ TP — Use the same baud rate and communication settings for all controllers on the network segment. The UPC Open controller is fixed at 8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 Stop bit for this protocol's communications.

If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power, pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's power terminals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the DIP Switches and jumpers each time power is applied to it.

Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to “enable.” Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS4 to “E1-485.” Set the BMS Protocol DIP switches DS8 through DS5 to “MSTP.” See Table A.

Table A — SW3 Protocol Switch Settings

for MS/TP

DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3

OffOffOffOffOnOff

Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are set to EIA-485 and 2W.

The example in Fig. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches set for 76.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP.

Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appropriate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600,

19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps). See Fig. C and Table B.

Table B — Baud Selection Table

BAUD RATE DS2 DS1

9,600 Off Off 19,200 On Off 38,400 Off On 76,800 On On

WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/ TP NETWORK — The UPC Open controller communicates using BACnet on an MS/TP network segment communications at 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, or 76.8 kbps.

Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a daisy-chain configuration. Wire specifications for the cable are 22 AWG (American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG, low-capacitance, twisted, stranded, shielded copper wire. The maximum length is 2000 ft.

Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last Multi-Chiller Controller on a network segment to add bias and prevent signal distortions due to echoing. See Fig. A, D, and E. For MultiChiller Controller only need BT485 on the end.

To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network:

1. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's BAS Port.

2. Check the communications wiring for shorts and grounds.

3. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS port’s screw terminals labeled Net +, Net -, and Shield.

NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network segment.

4. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC

Open controller's power terminals if they are not currently connected.

5. Verify communication with the network by viewing a

module status report. To perform a module status report using the BACview keypad/display unit, press and hold the “FN” key then press the “.” Key.

APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Fig. E — BT485 Terminator Installation

To install a BT485 terminator, push the BT485 terminator

on to the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector. NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with

it.

To order a BT485 terminator, consult Commercial Products

i-Vu

Open Control System Master Prices.

MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS — Recommendations are shown in Tables C and D. The wire jacket and UL

Table C — MS/TP Wiring Recommendations

SPECIFICATION RECOMMENDATION

Cable Single twisted pair, low capacitance, CL2P, 22 AWG (7x30), TC foam FEP, plenum rated cable

Conductor 22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated)

Insulation Foamed FEP 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) wall 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) O.D.

Color Code Black/White

Twist Lay 2 in. (50.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal Shielding Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire

Jacket

DC Resistance 15.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal

Capacitance 12.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor

Characteristic Impedance 100 Ohms nominal

Weight 12 lb/1000 feet (17.9 kg/km)

UL Temperature Rating

Voltage 300 Vac, power limited

Listing UL: NEC CL2P, or better

LEGEND

AWG — American Wire Gage CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable DC — Direct Current FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer NEC — National Electrical Code O.D. — Outside Diameter TC — Tinned Copper UL — Underwriters Laboratories

SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0.021 in. (0.5334 mm) wall 0.175 in. (4.445 mm) O.D. Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) wall 0.144 in. (3.6576 mm) O.D.

SmokeGard 167°F (75°C) Halar -40 to 302°F (-40 to 150°C)

temperature rating specifications list two acceptable alternatives. The Halar* specification has a higher temperature rating and a tougher outer jacket than the SmokeGard† specification, and it is appropriate for use in applications where the user is concerned about abrasion. The Halar jacket is also less likely to crack in extremely low temperatures.

NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum signal integrity.

Halar is a registered trademark of Solvay Plastics.

* † SmokeGard is a registered trademark of AlphaGary-Mexichem Corp.

APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Fig. F — BACview6 Device Connection

Table D — Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors

WIRING SPECIFICATIONS RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS

Wire Type Description

22 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P, TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for

MS/TP

Network (RS-485)

Rnet 4 conductor, unshielded, CMP, 18 AWG, plenum rated. W184C-2099BLB 6302UE 21450 CLP0442

LEGEND

AWG — American Wire Gage CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable CMP — Communications Plenum Rated FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer TC — Tinned Copper

specifications. 24 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,

TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for specifications.

Connect Air

International

W221P-22227 — 25160PV CLP0520LC

W241P-2000F 82841 25120-OR —

Belden RMCORP

Contractors

Wire and Cable

LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The user can use a BACview

handheld keypad display unit or the Virtual BACview software as a local user interface to an Open controller. These items let the user access the controller network information. These are accessory items and do not come with the UPC Open controller.

The BACview

unit connects to the local access port on the UPC Open controller. See Fig. F. The BACview software must be running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local access port on the UPC Open controller. The laptop will require an additional USB link cable for connection.

See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instruc-

tions on connecting and using the BACview

To order a BACview

Handheld (BV6H), consult Commer-

device.

cial Products i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices. CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER'S

PROPERTIES — The UPC Open device and ComfortLink controller must be set to the same CCN Address (Element)

number and CCN Bus number. The factory default settings for CCN Element and CCN Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively.

If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are required, both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations must be changed.

The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address and Bus number in the ComfortLink controller. These configurations can be changed using the scrolling marquee display or accessory Navigator handheld device.

Configuration→CCN→CCN.A (CCN Address)

Configuration→CCN→CCN.B (CCN Bus Number)

The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. These configurations can be changed using the accessory BACview

dis-

play.

Navigation: BACview→CCN Home: Element Comm Stat Element: 1 Bus: 0

APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

If the UPC Open controller is used with the chiller application of Lead/Lag/Standby (Lead/Lag/Standby applications are not used with the Multi-Chiller Controller), all chillers and UPC Open controller's CCN element numbers must be changed to a unique number in order to follow CCN specifications. In this application, there can only be a maximum of 3 UPC Open controllers on a CCN bus.

For the CCN Alarm Acknowledger configuration, the UPC Open defaults to CCN Acknowledger. If a Chiller Lead/Lag/ Standby application is being used, then the Carrier technician must change the configuration to only one CCN Acknowledger on the CCN bus.

For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration, the UPC Open defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the Chiller Lead/ Lag/Standby application is used, then the Carrier technician must change the configuration to only one CCN Time Broadcaster on the CCN bus.

TROUBLESHOOTING — If there are problems wiring or addressing the UPC Open controller, contact Carrier Technical Support.

COMMUNICATION LEDS

— The LEDs indicate if the

controller is communicating with the devices on the network.

Table E — LED Status Indicators

LED STATUS

Power

Rx Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2. Tx Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment; there is a Tx LED for Ports 1 and 2.

Run Lights based on controller status. See Table F.

Error Lights based on controller status. See Table F.

Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on the incoming power and network connections. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition that caused the fault returns to normal.

See Tables E and F. The LEDs should reflect communication traffic based on the baud rate set. The higher the baud rate the more solid the LEDs become. See Fig. A for location of LEDs on UPC Open module.

REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BATTERY — The UPC Open controller’s 10-year lithium CR2032 battery provides a minimum of 10,000 hours of data retention during power outages.

IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open controller when replacing the battery, or the date, time, and trend data will be lost.

Remove the battery from the controller, making note of the battery's polarity. Insert the new battery, matching the battery's polarity with the polarity indicated on the UPC Open controller.

NETWORK POINTS LIST — The points list for the controller is shown in Table G.

Refer to Appendix B for additional information on CCN point name.

Table F — Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication

RUN LED ERROR LED STATUS

2 flashes per second Off Normal 2 flashes per second 2 flashes, alternating with Run LED Five minute auto-restart delay after system error 2 flashes per second 3 flashes, then off Controller has just been formatted 2 flashes per second 1 flash per second Controller is alone on the network 2 flashes per second On Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted 5 flashes per second On Exec start-up aborted, Boot is running 5 flashes per second Off Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running 7 flashes per second 7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Ten second recovery period after brownout 14 flashes per second 14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Brownout

APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table G — Network Points List

POINT DESCRIPTION

4-20 ma Demand Signal LMT_MA R mA 0-20 AV:36 lmt_ma_1 4-20 ma Reset Signal RST_MA R mA 0-20 AV:33 rst_ma_1 Active Demand Limit DEM_LIM R/W % 100 0-100 AV:2 dem_lim_1 Active Setpoint SP R °F -20-70 AV:4 sp_1

Alarm State ALM R

CCN Chiller CHIL_S_S R/W Start Start/Stop BV:4 chil_s_s_1 CCN Loadshed Signal DL_STAT R 0-2 AV:37 dl_stat_1 Comp A1 Unload Time A1UNLTME R sec 1-15 AV:78 a1unltme_1 Compr Return Gas Temp TMP_RGTA R °F -40-245 AV:20 tmp_rgta_1 Compressor A1 Feedback K_A1_FBK R On/Off BV:16 k_a1_fbk_1 Compressor A1 Relay K_A1_RLY R On/Off BV:13 k_a1_rly_1 Compressor A1 Run Hours HR_A1 R hr 0-9999 AV:60 hr_a1_1 Compressor A1 Starts CY_A1 R 0-9999 AV:68 cy_a1_1 Compressor A2 Feedback K_A2_FBK R On/Off BV:17 k_a2_fbk_1 Compressor A2 Relay K_A2_RLY R On/Off BV:14 k_a2_rly_1 Compressor A2 Run Hours HR_A2 R hr 0-9999 AV:61 hr_a2_1 Compressor A2 Starts CY_A2 R 0-9999 AV:69 cy_a2_1 Compressor A3 Feedback K_A3_FBK R On/Off BV:18 k_a3_fbk_1 Compressor A3 Relay K_A3_RLY R On/Off BV:15 k_a3_rly_1 Compressor A3 Run Hours HR_A3 R hr 0-9999 AV:62 hr_a3_1 Compressor A3 Starts CY_A3 R 0-9999 AV:70 cy_a3_1 Condenser Entering Fluid COND_EWT R °F -40-245 AV:10 cond_ewt_1 Condenser Leaving Fluid COND_LWT R °F -40-245 AV:18 cond_lwt_1 Condenser Pump Relay CONDPUMP R On/Off BV:2 condpump_1 Condenser Pump Run Hours HR_DPUMP R hr 0-9999 AV:72 hr_dpump_1

Control Method CONTROL R

Control Mode STAT R 0-9 AV:8 stat_1 Control Point CTRL_PNT R/W °F 44.0 -20-70 AV:5 ctrl_pnt_1 Cooler Entering Fluid COOL_EWT R °F -40-245 AV:30 cool_ewt_1 Cooler Flow Switch COOLFLOW R Open/Close BV:11 coolflow_1

Cooler Fluid FLUIDTYP R

Cooler Freeze Protection MODE_16 R On/Off BV:42 mode_16_1 Cooler Leaving Fluid COOL_LWT R °F -40-245 AV:31 cool_lwt_1 Cooler LWT Setpoint LWT_SP °F -20-70 AV:38 lwt_sp_1 Cooler Pump Relay COOLPUMP R On/Off BV:7 coolpump_1 Cooler Pump Run Hours HR_CPUMP R hr 0-9999 AV:71 hr_cpump_1 Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly PUMP_DLY R/W min 1 0-10 AV:41 pump_dly_1 Cooling Ramp Loading

ing Reset Type CRST_TYP R

Cool

Cooling Setpoint 1 CSP1 R/W °F 44.0 -20-70 AV:53 csp1_1 Cooling Setpoint 2 CSP2 R/W °F 44.0 -20-70 AV:54 csp2_1 CSM controlling Chiller MODE_1 R On/Off BV:30 mode_1_1 Demand Level 1 R/W 0-100 AV:80 dmv_lvl_1_perct_1 Demand Level 2 R/W 0-100 AV:81 dmv_lvl_2_perct_1 Demand Level 3 R/W 0-100 AV:82 dmv_lvl_3_perct_1

Demand Limit Select DMD_CTRL R

Demand Limit Switch 1 DMD_SW1 R On/Off BV:25 dmd_sw1_1 Demand Limit Switch 2 DMD_SW2 R On/Off BV:26 dmd_sw2_1 Demand/Sound Limited MODE_15 R On/Off BV:41 mode_15_1 Discharge Gas Temp DISGAS R °F -40-245 AV:15 disgas_1 Discharge Pressure DP_A R psig 0-999 AV:13 dp_a_1

CCN POINT

NAME

CRAMP R/W °F 1.0 0.2-2.0 AV:56 cramp_1

READ/ WRITE

UNITS

DEFAULT

VALUE

RANGE

1 = Normal 2 = Alarm 3 = Alert

1 = Switch 2 = Occupancy 3 = Occupancy 4 = CCN

1 = Water 2 = Medium Brine

1 = No Reset 2 = 4-20mA Input 3 = External Temp Oat 4 = Return Fluid 5 = External Temp - Spt

1 = None 2 = External Sw. Input 3 = 4-20mA Input 4 = Loadshed

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BV:59 alm_1

MSV:5 control_msv_1

MSV:4 fluidtyp_msv_1

MSV:7 crst_typ1_msv_1

MSV:8 dmd_ctrl_msv_1

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

LEGEND

R—Read W—Write

APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

POINT DESCRIPTION

Dual Setpoint MODE_13 R On/Off BV:39 mode_13_1 Dual Setpoint Switch DUAL_IN R On/Off BV:29 dual_in_1 Element Comm Status R BV:2999 element_stat_1 Emergency Stop EMSTOP R/W Enabled Enabled/Emstop BV:6 emstop_1 Entering Fluid Temp EWT R °F -40-245 AV:6 ewt_1 EXV% Open EXV_A R % AV:18 exv_a_1 High SCT Circuit A MODE_21 R On/Off BV:47 mode_21_1 High Temperature Cooling MODE_18 R On/Off BV:44 mode_18_1 Ice Done ICE_DONE R On/Off BV:27 ice_done_1 ICE Setpoint CSP3 R/W °F 32.0 -20-32 AV:55 csp3_1 Lead/Lag Circuit Select LEAD_TYP R/W 1 1-3 AV:43 lead_typ_1 Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid DUAL_LWT R °F -40-245 AV:32 dual_lwt_1 Leaving Fluid Temp LWT R °F -40-245 AV:7 lwt_1 Loading Sequence Select SEQ_TYPE R/W 1-2 AV:77 seq_type_1 Low Cooler Suction TempA MODE_7 R On/Off BV:35 mode_7_1 Low Sound Mode MODE_25 R On/Off BV:51 mode_25_1 Low Temperature Cooling MODE_17 R On/Off BV:43 mode_17_1 Machine Operating Hours HR_MACH R hr 0-9999 AV:57 mr_mach_1 Machine Starts CY_MACH R 0-9999 AV:58 cy_mach_1 Making ICE MODE_19 R On/Off BV:45 mode_19_1 Master/Slave Control MODE_3 R On/Off BV:32 mode_3_1 Minimum Comp. On Time MODE_23 R On/Off BV:49 mode_23_1 Minimum Load Valve Relay MLV_RLY R On/Off BV:79 mlv_rly_1 Minimum OFF Time Active MODE_10 R On/Off BV:38 mode_10_1 Minutes Left for Start MIN_LEFT R min 00:00-15:00 AV:39 min_left_1 Minutes Off Time DELAY R/W min 0 0-15 AV:42 delay_1 Occupancy Status OCC R Yes/No BV:2008 occ_status_1 Outdoor Air Temperature OAT R/W °F -40-245 AV:1003 oa_temp_1 Override Modes in Effect MODE R Yes/No BV:5 mode_1 Percent Available Cap. CAPA_A R % 0-100 AV:12 capa_a_1 Percent Total Capacity CAP_T R % 0-100 AV:3 cap_t_1 Percent Total Capacity CAPA_T R % 0-100 AV:11 capa_t_1 Pump Off Delay Time MODE_24 R On/Off BV:50 mode_24_1 Ramp Load Limited MODE_5 R On/Off BV:33 mode_5_1 Requested Stage STAGE R 0-99 AV:9 stage_1 Saturated Condensing Tmp TMP_SCTA R °F -40-245 AV:16 tmp_scta_1 Saturated Suction Temp TMP_SSTA R °F -40-245 AV:17 tmp_ssta_1 Slow Change Override MODE_9 R On/Off BV:37 mode_9_1 Space Temperature SPT R/W °F -40-245 AV:2007 space_temp_1 Storing ICE MODE_20 R On/Off BV:46 mode_20_1 Strainer Maint. Done ST_MAINT R/W Yes/No BV:55 st_maint_1 Strainer Srvc Countdown ST_CDOWN R hr 0-9999 AV:52 st_cdown_1 Strainer Srvc Interval SI_STRNR R/W hr 0-9999 AV:51 si_strnr_1 Suction Pressure SP_A R psig 0-999 AV:14 sp_a_1 Suction Superheat Temp SH_A System Cooling Demand Level R 1-3 AV:9006 cool_demand_level_1 System Demand Limiting R ACTIVE_INACTIVE BV:83 dem_lmt_act_1 Temperature Reset MODE_14 R On/Off BV:40 mode_14_1 Timed Override in Effect MODE_6 R On/Off BV:34 mode_6_1 User Defined Analog 1 R/W AV:2901 user_analog_1_1 User Defined Analog 2 R/W AV:2902 user_analog_2_1 User Defined Analog 3 R/W AV:2903 user_analog_3_1 User Defined Analog 4 R/W AV:2904 user_analog_4_1 User Defined Analog 5 R/W AV:2905 user_analog_5_1 User Defined Binary 1 R/W BV:2911 user_binary_1_1 User Defined Binary 2 R/W BV:2912 user_binary_2_1 User Defined Binary 3 R/W BV:2913 user_binary_3_1 User Defined Binary 4 R/W BV:2914 user_binary_4_1 User Defined Binary 5 R/W BV:2915 user_binary_5_1 WSM Controlling Chiller MODE_2 R On/Off BV:31 mode_2_1

CCN POINT

NAME

READ/ WRITE

UNITS

R °F -40-245 AV:44 sh_a_1

DEFAULT

VALUE

RANGE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

APPENDIX D — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS

30MP Weekly Maintenance Log

Plant ___________________________ Unit ID ______________________ Machine Model No. ________________

DATE OIL LEVEL

CHECK ALARMS

/ FAULTS

OPERATOR

INITIALS

REMARKS

APPENDIX D — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30MP Monthly Maintenance Log

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

Month 123456789101112

Da te / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Operator

UNIT

SECTION

ACTION UNIT ENTRY

Compressor

Check Oil Level yes/no

Leak Test yes/no

Cooler

Inspect and Clean Cooler yes/no

Every 3 - 5 Years

Inspect Cooler Heater amps

Leak Test yes/no

Record Water Pressure Differential (PSI) PSI

Inspect Water Pumps yes/no

Condenser

Leak Test yes/no

Inspect and Clean Condenser Coil yes/no

Controls

General Cleaning and Tightening Connections yes/no

Annually

Check Pressure Transducers yes/no

Confirm Accuracy of Thermistors yes/no

Starter

General Tightening and Cleaning Connections yes/no

Annually

Inspect All Contactors yes/no

System

Check Refrigerant Charge yes/no

Verify Operation of EXVs and Record Position 0-100%

Record System Superheat deg. F

Alarms and alerts, 59

Codes, 60 Details, 60 History, 81

Resetting, 81 Alarm routing, 25 Auxiliary board (AUX)

Described, 7

Schematic, 12 BACnet communication option, 88

BAS port, configuring, 89

Device instance address, 88

Points list, 93, 94 Capacity control, 17

Overrides, 18 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN), 13

Tables, 82-87

Wiring, 16 Chilled water flow switch, 47 Compressors

Adjusting oil charge, 39

Checking oil level, 39

Digital, 36

Discharge Check Valve, 53

Enabling and disabling, 53

Failure Alerts, 63

Locations, 43

Motor overload protection, 54

Motor protection, 59

Operating envelope, 66,67

Replacement, 44

Safeties, 53

Stuck on failure alarms, 64 Compressor return gas temp sensor (RGT.A), 15 Condenser entering fluid sensor (CDET),

Condenser fan output, 27 Condenser leaving fluid sensor (CDLT), 15 Condenser pump control, 27 Control methods (start/stop)

CCN control, 25

Enable-Off-Remote, 21

Occupancy schedule, 21

Setting, 26 Control module communication

Green LED (main base board), 7

Red LED (main base board), 7

Yellow LED (main base board), 7 Control wiring schematics

30MP015-071, 11 Cooling entering fluid sensor (EWT), 18 Cooling leaving fluid sensor (LWT), 15 Current sensing board (CSB)

Described,

Deadband multiplier, 19 Demand limit, 34

2-stage switch controlled, 34

4 to 20 mA controlled, 34

CCN loadshed, 34 Discharge temperature thermistor (DTT), 15 Dual leaving water temperature sensor (DLWT), 15 Electronic expansion valves, 41 Emergency On/Off switch, 7 Enable/Off/Remote Control switch, 7 Energy management module (EMM),

16,18

Described, 7 Evacuation and dehydration, 38

INDEX

Expansion Valve Board (EXV)

Described, 7 Filter drier service, 45 High pressure switch (HPS)

Described,

Usage, 46 Language, changing display, 6 LEDs, 7 Main base board (MBB)

Described, 7

Schematic, 12 Maintenance, 52

Schedule, 52 Measure of units, changing display, 6 Minimum load control, 36 Minutes left for start, 17 Minutes off time, 18 Motor overload protection, compressor, 54

Copeland with TF code, 54

Copeland with TW or TE, 54

CoreSense module mounting, 56

Kriwan, 55 Navigator display

Backlight brightness, 6

Contrast adjustment, 6

Display tables, 72-81 Occupancy schedule

CCN global, 24

Holidays, 21

Local schedule, 21

Setting, 21

Timed override, 24 Oil

Adjusting charge (start-up), 39

Checking level (start-up), 39

Charging (service), 45

Quantity per compressor, 39 Operating limitations, 40 Operating modes

Defined, 5

MD06, 24

MD10, 18 Outdoor-air temperature sensor (OAT),

Passwords

Changing, 7

Configuration and service, 7

Entering, 7 Power wiring schematics

30MP015-071 10 Pre-start-up, 36 Pressure transducers

Color, 15

Described, 14

Safeties, 46

Troubleshooting, 47 Ramp loading, 19 Refrigerant

Adjusting charge, 39

Preliminary charge, 37 Refrigeration circuit

Charging, 41 Safety, 2,3 Scrolling marquee display

Described, 3

Menu structure, 4 Service, 40 Service test, 40 Sizes, unit, 3

Space temperature sensor, 15 Start-up, 37

Checklist, CL-1 to CL-8 System check (pre-start-up), 36 Temperature reset, 31

4 to 20 mA temperature reset, 32

Menu configuration, 32

Outside air temperature reset, 32

Space temperature reset, 32

Return temperature reset, 33 Thermostatic expansion valves, 20 Thermistors

Described, 46

Designations (MBB), 14

Performance Check, 46

Replacing, 46,

Temperature vs. resistance/voltage

drop (5K), 48, 49

Temperature vs. resistance/voltage

drop (10K), 50, 51

Temperature vs. resistance (86K), 51 Time, day, date

Broadcast, 20

Daylight savings time, 20 Troubleshooting, 52

Alarms and alerts, 59

Alarm and alert codes, 60-63

Alarm and alert details, 60-71

Resetting alarms, 60-63 UPC Open controller

Addressing, 88

Battery, testing and replacing, 92

Configuring, 91

LEDs, 92

Local access, 91

Wiring, 89 Water treatment, 45 Wiring, Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN), 16 Wiring schematics, control

30MP015-071, 11 Wiring schematics, power

30MP015-071 10

 Carrier Corporation 2017

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300170-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30MP-4T Pg 100 8-17 Replaces: 30MP-3T

Carrier 30MPA015, 30MPW015, 30MPW071, 30MPA071, 30MPW Controls, Start-up, Operation, Service, And Troubleshooting

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

CONTENTS

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

GENERAL

Basic Control Usage

CONTROLS

Control Module Communication

Cooling Set Point Select

PRE-START-UP

System Check

START-UP AND OPERATION

Operating Limitations

OPERATION SEQUENCE

SERVICE

Electronic Components

VALVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT

30MP Cooler and 30MPW Condenser

Oil Charge

Check Refrigerant Feed Components

Check Unit Safeties

COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION

MAINTENANCE

TROUBLESHOOTING

Motor Overload Protection

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES

APPENDIX C — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION

COMMUNICATION LEDS

APPENDIX D — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS

INDEX